bfd: remove unused local variables in elf32-score, elf32-score7 and elfxx-mips
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
3aa2d05a
NC
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
a70f34c0
NC
946@kindex --strip-discarded
947@kindex --no-strip-discarded
948@item --strip-discarded
949@itemx --no-strip-discarded
950Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951Enabled by default.
952
252b5132
RH
953@kindex -t
954@kindex --trace
955@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 956@item -t
252b5132 957@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 958Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -T @var{script}
961@kindex --script=@var{script}
962@cindex script files
963@item -T @var{scriptfile}
964@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 966@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 967@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
968output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971options accumulate.
252b5132 972
14be8564
L
973@kindex -dT @var{script}
974@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975@cindex script files
976@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987@samp{gcc}).
988
252b5132
RH
989@kindex -u @var{symbol}
990@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991@cindex undefined symbol
992@item -u @var{symbol}
993@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
0a618243
AB
1000If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003instead.
1004
1005@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006@cindex symbols, require defined
1007@cindex defined symbol
1008@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
252b5132
RH
1016@kindex -Ur
1017@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1019For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1021turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1022@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026@samp{-r} for the others.
1027
c005eb9e
AB
1028@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029@cindex orphan sections
1030@cindex sections, orphan
1031@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037@table @code
1038@item place
1039Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1041@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1042
1043@item discard
1044All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047@item warn
1048The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049issue a warning.
1050
1051@item error
1052The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053@end table
1054
1055The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
577a0623
AM
1057@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1066
252b5132
RH
1067@kindex -v
1068@kindex -V
1069@kindex --version
1070@cindex version
1071@item -v
1072@itemx --version
1073@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1074Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1075lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077@kindex -x
1078@kindex --discard-all
1079@cindex deleting local symbols
1080@item -x
1081@itemx --discard-all
1082Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084@kindex -X
1085@kindex --discard-locals
1086@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1087@item -X
252b5132 1088@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1089Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1092
1093@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095@cindex symbol tracing
1096@item -y @var{symbol}
1097@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105@kindex -Y @var{path}
1106@item -Y @var{path}
1107Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1112The recognized keywords are:
1113@table @samp
1114
1115@item combreloc
1116Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117lookup caching possible.
1118
b8871f35
L
1119@item common
1120Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121link.
1122
cd6d6c15 1123@item defs
560e09e9 1124Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1125shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1126
6aa29e7b
JJ
1127@item execstack
1128Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
b039ef04
L
1130@item global
1131This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@item initfirst
1136This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141objects.
1142
1143@item interpose
1144Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145but the primary executable.
1146
5fa222e4
AM
1147@item lazy
1148When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151Lazy binding is the default.
1152
cd6d6c15
NC
1153@item loadfltr
1154Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155runtime.
1156
1157@item muldefs
1158Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160@item nocombreloc
1161Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
b8871f35
L
1163@item nocommon
1164Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165link.
1166
cd6d6c15 1167@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1168Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1170
1171@item nodefaultlib
1172Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175@item nodelete
1176Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178@item nodlopen
1179Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181@item nodump
1182Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
6aa29e7b
JJ
1184@item noexecstack
1185Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
8dfef1bd
L
1187@item text
1188Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190@item notext
1191Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193@item textoff
1194Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item norelro
1197Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
cd6d6c15
NC
1199@item now
1200When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204first called.
1205
1206@item origin
1207Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
6aa29e7b
JJ
1209@item relro
1210Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
24718e3b
L
1212@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
04c3a755
NS
1218@item stack-size=@var{value}
1219Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
d258b828
IZ
1223@item bndplt
1224Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
889c2a67
L
1226@item noextern-protected-data
1227Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1231module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1232i386 and x86-64.
1233
954b63d4
AM
1234@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238option.
1239
aec6b87e 1240@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1241Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1246
4c10bbaa
L
1247@item noreloc-overflow
1248Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
caa65211 1252@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1253@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1259@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
cd6d6c15
NC
1264@end table
1265
ece2d90e 1266Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1267
1268@kindex -(
1269@cindex groups of archives
1270@item -( @var{archives} -)
1271@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1272The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1273either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1274
1275The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1276references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1277the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1278archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1279object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1280would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1281they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1282resolved.
1283
1284Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1285it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1286more archives.
1287
69da35b5
NC
1288@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1289@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1290@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1291@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1292Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1293recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1294and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1295the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1296behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1297so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1298restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1299
4a43e768
AM
1300@kindex --as-needed
1301@kindex --no-as-needed
1302@item --as-needed
1303@itemx --no-as-needed
1304This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1305on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1306the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1307on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1308needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1309emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1310non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1311the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1312non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1313Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1314the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1315needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1316from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1317
e56f61be
L
1318@kindex --add-needed
1319@kindex --no-add-needed
1320@item --add-needed
1321@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1322These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1323their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1324options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1325and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1326
252b5132
RH
1327@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1328@item -assert @var{keyword}
1329This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1330
1331@kindex -Bdynamic
1332@kindex -dy
1333@kindex -call_shared
1334@item -Bdynamic
1335@itemx -dy
1336@itemx -call_shared
1337Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1338for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1339default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1340for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1341multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1342@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1343
a1ab1d2a
UD
1344@kindex -Bgroup
1345@item -Bgroup
1346Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1347section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1348object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1349@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1350only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1351
252b5132
RH
1352@kindex -Bstatic
1353@kindex -dn
1354@kindex -non_shared
1355@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1356@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1357@itemx -dn
1358@itemx -non_shared
1359@itemx -static
1360Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1361platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1362variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1363may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1364library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1365option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1366option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1367shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1368references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1369libraries.
252b5132
RH
1370
1371@kindex -Bsymbolic
1372@item -Bsymbolic
1373When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1374definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1375for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1376within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1377@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1378executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1379the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1380support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1381
40b36307
L
1382@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1383@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1384When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1385symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1386This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1387when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1388to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1389This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1390libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1391
55255dae
L
1392@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1393@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1394Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1395typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1396global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1397within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1398to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1399in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1400which support shared libraries.
1401
1402The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1403scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1404
40b36307
L
1405@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1406@item --dynamic-list-data
1407Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1408
1409@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1410@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1411Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1412is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1413
0b8a70d9
L
1414@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1415@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1416Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1417
252b5132
RH
1418@kindex --check-sections
1419@kindex --no-check-sections
1420@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1421@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1422Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1423been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1424perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1425suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1426allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1427restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1428Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1429force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1430option.
252b5132 1431
ddbb8a31
NC
1432@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1433@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1434@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1435@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1436This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1437by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1438command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1439output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1440input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1441specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1442follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1443behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1444
1445This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1446libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1447mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1448their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1449required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1450the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1451dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1452symbols.
1453
252b5132
RH
1454@cindex cross reference table
1455@kindex --cref
1456@item --cref
1457Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1458generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1459Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1460
1461The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1462easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1463sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1464symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1465definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1466where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1467symbol are listed.
252b5132 1468
4818e05f
AM
1469@cindex common allocation
1470@kindex --no-define-common
1471@item --no-define-common
1472This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1473The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1474@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1475
1476The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1477the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1478of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1479forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1480Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1481from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1482This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1483and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1484duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1485paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1486
252b5132 1487@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1488@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1489@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1490Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1491address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1492times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1493limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1494context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1495symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1496constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1497using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1498@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1499equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1500
1501@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1502@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1503@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1504@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1505@itemx --no-demangle
1506These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1507and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1508present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1509underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1510mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1511different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1512to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1513demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1514is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1515
1516@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1517@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1518@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1519@item -I@var{file}
1520@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1521Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1522generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1523linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1524doing.
1525
9b8b325a
RF
1526@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1527@item --no-dynamic-linker
1528When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1529linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1530executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1531entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1532
a70f34c0
NC
1533@kindex --embedded-relocs
1534@item --embedded-relocs
1535This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1536that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1537is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1538targets.
1539
7ce691ae 1540@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1541@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1542@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1543@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1544Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1545with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1546
252b5132
RH
1547@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1548@item --force-exe-suffix
1549Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1550
1551If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1552@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1553the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1554option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1555Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1556it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1557
1558@kindex --gc-sections
1559@kindex --no-gc-sections
1560@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1561@item --gc-sections
1562@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1563Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1564targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1565performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1566@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1567collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1568implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1569
d5465ba2
AM
1570@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1571examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1572symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1573command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1574referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1575libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1576referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1577the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1578relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1579
ac69cbc6 1580This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1581@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1582specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1583a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1584
c17d87de
NC
1585@kindex --print-gc-sections
1586@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1587@cindex garbage collection
1588@item --print-gc-sections
1589@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1590List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1591printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1592collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1593default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1594be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1595line.
1596
22185505 1597@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1598@cindex garbage collection
1599@item --gc-keep-exported
1600When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1601collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1602default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1603executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1604collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1605Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1606it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1607ELF format targets.
1608
30824704
RM
1609@kindex --print-output-format
1610@cindex output format
1611@item --print-output-format
1612Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1613other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1614in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1615
3604cb1f
TG
1616@kindex --print-memory-usage
1617@cindex memory usage
1618@item --print-memory-usage
1619Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1620the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1621quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1622headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1623parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1624
1625@smallexample
1626Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1627 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1628 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1629@end smallexample
1630
252b5132
RH
1631@cindex help
1632@cindex usage
1633@kindex --help
1634@item --help
1635Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1636
ea20a7da
CC
1637@kindex --target-help
1638@item --target-help
1639Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1640
2509a395
SL
1641@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1642@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1643Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1644@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1645
1646@cindex memory usage
1647@kindex --no-keep-memory
1648@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1649@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1650symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1651instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1652necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1653while linking a large executable.
1654
1655@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1656@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1657@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1658@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1659Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1660is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1661The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1662behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1663libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1664
aa713662
L
1665@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1666@kindex -z muldefs
1667@item --allow-multiple-definition
1668@itemx -z muldefs
1669Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1670report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1671first definition will be used.
1672
b79e8c78 1673@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1674@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1675@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1676@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1677Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1678This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1679determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1680shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1681how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1682
903249d7
NC
1683The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1684referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1685an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1686a shared library.
1687
1688The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1689libraries specified at link time are that:
1690
1691@itemize @bullet
1692@item
1693A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1694that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1695resolvable at load time.
1696@item
1697There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1698symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1699
1700The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1701select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1702architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1703appropriate memset function.
1704@end itemize
b79e8c78 1705
31941635
L
1706@kindex --no-undefined-version
1707@item --no-undefined-version
1708Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1709it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1710will be issued instead.
1711
3e3b46e5
PB
1712@kindex --default-symver
1713@item --default-symver
1714Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1715exported symbols.
1716
1717@kindex --default-imported-symver
1718@item --default-imported-symver
1719Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1720imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1721
252b5132
RH
1722@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1723@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1724Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1725files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1726been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1727This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1728errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1729have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1730inappropriate.
1731
fe7929ce
AM
1732@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1733@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1734Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1735library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1736
252b5132
RH
1737@kindex --no-whole-archive
1738@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1739Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1740archive files.
1741
1742@cindex output file after errors
1743@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1744@item --noinhibit-exec
1745Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1746Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1747errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1748when it issues any error whatsoever.
1749
0a9c1c8e
CD
1750@kindex -nostdlib
1751@item -nostdlib
1752Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1753command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1754(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1755
252b5132 1756@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1757@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1758@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1759@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1760file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1761@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1762object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1763object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1764should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1765usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1766name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1767list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1768command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1769this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1770@end ifclear
1771
76359541
TP
1772@kindex --out-implib
1773@item --out-implib @var{file}
1774Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1775the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1776library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1777may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1778behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1779step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1780the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1781
36af4a4e
JJ
1782@kindex -pie
1783@kindex --pic-executable
1784@item -pie
1785@itemx --pic-executable
1786@cindex position independent executables
1787Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1788ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1789libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1790address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1791normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1792defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1793
252b5132
RH
1794@kindex -qmagic
1795@item -qmagic
1796This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1797
1798@kindex -Qy
1799@item -Qy
1800This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1801
1802@kindex --relax
1803@cindex synthesizing linker
1804@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1805@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1806@item --relax
28d5f677 1807@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1808An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1809@ifset GENERIC
1810This option is only supported on a few targets.
1811@end ifset
1812@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1813@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1814@end ifset
1815@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1816@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1817@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1818@ifset XTENSA
1819@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1820@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1821@ifset M68HC11
1822@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1823@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1824@ifset NIOSII
1825@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1826@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1827@ifset POWERPC
1828@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1829@end ifset
252b5132 1830
28d5f677
NC
1831On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1832global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1833addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1834synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1835instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1836
1837On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1838debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1839@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1840This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1841family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1842@end ifset
1843
1844@ifset GENERIC
1845On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1846but ignored.
1847@end ifset
1848
28d5f677
NC
1849On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1850@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1851
252b5132
RH
1852@cindex retaining specified symbols
1853@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1854@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1855@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1856@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1857Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1858discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1859symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1860@ifset GENERIC
1861(such as VxWorks)
1862@end ifset
1863where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1864run-time memory.
1865
1866@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1867or symbols needed for relocations.
1868
1869You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1870line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1871
1872@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1873@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1874@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1875@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1876Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1877linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1878arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1879them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1880also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1881objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1882@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1883ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1884@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1885
ff5dcc92 1886The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1887SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1888@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1889runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1890options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1891gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1892file systems.
252b5132 1893
ff5dcc92 1894For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1895followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1896the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1897@end ifset
1898
1899@ifset GENERIC
1900@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1901@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1902@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1903When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1904happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1905of the input files.
1906
1907When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1908non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1909shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1910explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1911specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1912@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1913either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1914appearing multiple times.
1915
e680a6b6
NC
1916The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1917directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1918containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1919and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
192064-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1921
1922The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1923@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1924supported.
1925
28c309a2
NC
1926This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1927that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1928is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1929runtime linker would do.
1930
252b5132 1931The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1932libraries:
252b5132
RH
1933@enumerate
1934@item
ff5dcc92 1935Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1936@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1937Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1938between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1939specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1940used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1941at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1942by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1943the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1944@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1945On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1946@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1947environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1948@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1949On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1950directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1951@item
a1b8d843 1952For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1953variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1954@item
ec4eb78a
L
1955For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1956@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1957libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1958@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1959@item
252b5132
RH
1960The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1961@item
1962For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1963exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1964@end enumerate
1965
1966If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1967warning and continue with the link.
1968@end ifset
1969
1970@kindex -shared
1971@kindex -Bshareable
1972@item -shared
1973@itemx -Bshareable
1974@cindex shared libraries
1975Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1976and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1977shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1978undefined symbols in the link.
1979
252b5132 1980@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1981@item --sort-common
1982@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1983@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1984This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1985ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1986sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1987eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1988between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1989specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1990
2509a395
SL
1991@kindex --sort-section=name
1992@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1993This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1994patterns in the linker script.
1995
2509a395
SL
1996@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1997@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1998This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1999patterns in the linker script.
2000
a70f34c0
NC
2001@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2002@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2003This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2004.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2005post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2006
252b5132 2007@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2008@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2009Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2010each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2011size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2012
2013@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2014@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2015Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2016output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2017This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2018certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2019cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2020that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2021support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2022input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2023more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2024many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2025
2026@kindex --stats
2027@item --stats
2028Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2029as execution time and memory usage.
2030
2509a395 2031@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2032@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2033Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2034configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2035that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2036
a70f34c0
NC
2037@kindex --task-link
2038@item --task-link
2039This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2040file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2041
252b5132
RH
2042@kindex --traditional-format
2043@cindex traditional format
2044@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2045For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2046the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2047use the traditional format instead.
2048
2049@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2050For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2051symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2052full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2053@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2054trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2055combine duplicate entries.
2056
2509a395
SL
2057@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2058@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2059Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2060address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2061times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2062line.
2063@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2064for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2065@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2066should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2067sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2068
2509a395
SL
2069@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2070@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2071@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2072@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2073@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2074@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2075@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2076Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2077@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2078
2509a395
SL
2079@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2080@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2081@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2082When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2083byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2084
9d5777a3
RM
2085@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2086@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2087@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2088When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2089the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2090text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2091
0d705e9f
AM
2092@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2093@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2094@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2095When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2096model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2097
560e09e9
NC
2098@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2099@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2100Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2101values for @samp{method}:
2102
2103@table @samp
2104@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2105Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2106
2107@item report-all
da8bce14 2108Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2109
2110@item ignore-in-object-files
2111Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2112ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2113
2114@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2115Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2116ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2117when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2118libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2119command line.
2120@end table
2121
2122The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2123by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2124
2125Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2126unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2127can change this to a warning.
2128
1715a13c
L
2129@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2130@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2131@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2132@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2133Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2134supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2135the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2136argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2137
2138@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2139@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2140@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2141Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2142used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2143about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2144is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2145see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2146use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2147symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2148@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2149
7ce691ae 2150@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2151@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2152@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2153@item --warn-common
2154Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2155a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2156but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2157you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2158Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2159warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2160
2161There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2162
2163@table @samp
2164@item int i = 1;
2165A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2166file.
2167
2168@item extern int i;
2169An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2170There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2171variable somewhere.
2172
2173@item int i;
2174A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2175variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2176The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2177single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2178size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2179a definition of the same variable.
2180@end table
2181
2182The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2183Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2184just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2185encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2186a common symbol.
2187
2188@enumerate
2189@item
2190Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2191definition for the symbol.
2192@smallexample
2193@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2194 overridden by definition
2195@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2196@end smallexample
2197
2198@item
2199Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2200the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2201except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2202@smallexample
2203@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2204 overriding common
2205@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2206@end smallexample
2207
2208@item
2209Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2210@smallexample
2211@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2212 of `@var{symbol}'
2213@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2214@end smallexample
2215
2216@item
2217Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2218@smallexample
2219@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2220 overridden by larger common
2221@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2222@end smallexample
2223
2224@item
2225Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2226the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2227encountered in a different order.
2228@smallexample
2229@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2230 overriding smaller common
2231@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2232@end smallexample
2233@end enumerate
2234
2235@kindex --warn-constructors
2236@item --warn-constructors
2237Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2238object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2239detect the use of global constructors.
2240
2241@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2242@item --warn-multiple-gp
2243Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2244This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2245Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2246section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2247of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2248base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2249base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2250bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2251large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2252values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2253option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2254
2255@kindex --warn-once
2256@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2257@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2258@item --warn-once
2259Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2260which refers to it.
2261
2262@kindex --warn-section-align
2263@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2264@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2265@item --warn-section-align
2266Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2267alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2268The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2269is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2270the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2271
8fdd7217
NC
2272@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2273@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2274Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2275
a0c402a5
L
2276@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2277@item --warn-alternate-em
2278Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2279
560e09e9
NC
2280@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2281@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2282If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2283@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2284This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2285
2286@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2287@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2288This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2289it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2290
252b5132
RH
2291@kindex --whole-archive
2292@cindex including an entire archive
2293@item --whole-archive
2294For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2295@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2296in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2297files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2298library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2299library. This option may be used more than once.
2300
7ec229ce 2301Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2302about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2303Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2304list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2305your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2306
2509a395
SL
2307@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2308@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2309Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2310@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2311undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2312@var{symbol}.
2313
2314This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2315wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2316wishes to call the system function, it should call
2317@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2318
2319Here is a trivial example:
2320
2321@smallexample
2322void *
cc2f008e 2323__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2324@{
cc2f008e 2325 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2326 return __real_malloc (c);
2327@}
2328@end smallexample
2329
ff5dcc92 2330If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2331all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2332instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2333call the real @code{malloc} function.
2334
2335You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2336links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2337you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2338file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2339call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2340
6aa29e7b 2341@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2342@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2343@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2344@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2345Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2346(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2347section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2348
e41b3a13
JJ
2349@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2350@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2351Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2352generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2353if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2354
6c1439be
L
2355@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2356@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2357@item --enable-new-dtags
2358@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2359This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2360systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2361@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2362and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2363If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2364created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2365those options are only available for ELF systems.
2366
2d643429 2367@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2368@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2369Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2370close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2371time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2372increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2373value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2374
fdc90cb4
JJ
2375@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2376@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2377Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2378@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2379new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2380the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2381hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2382
0ce398f1
L
2383@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2384@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2385@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2386@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2387@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2388@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2389@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2390@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2391On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2392compressed using zlib.
2393
2394@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2395sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2396DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2397instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2398also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2399sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2400
2401The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2402@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2403
2404Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2405sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2406for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2407uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2408
2409The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2410involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2411default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2412@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2413
35835446
JR
2414@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2415@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2416This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2417linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2418for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2419about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2420
4f9c04f7 2421Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24221021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2423run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2424has been used.
2425
2426The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2427enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2428
c0065db7
RM
2429@kindex --build-id
2430@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2431@item --build-id
2432@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2433Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2434or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2435unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2436@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2437@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2438@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2439the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2440string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2441@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2442is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2443
2444The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2445that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2446unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2447to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2448file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2449string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2450
2451Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2452@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2453@end table
2454
0285c67d
NC
2455@c man end
2456
36f63dca 2457@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2458
0285c67d
NC
2459@c man begin OPTIONS
2460
ff5dcc92 2461The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2462the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2463normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2464use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2465@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2466like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2467symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2468object file).
2469
2470In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2471support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2472PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2473values by either a space or an equals sign.
2474
ff5dcc92 2475@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2476
2477@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2478@item --add-stdcall-alias
2479If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2480as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2481[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2482
2483@kindex --base-file
2484@item --base-file @var{file}
2485Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2486addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2487@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2488[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2489
2490@kindex --dll
2491@item --dll
2492Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2493@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2494file.
bb10df36 2495[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2496
88183869
DK
2497@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2498@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2499@item --enable-long-section-names
2500@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2501The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2502the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2503for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2504fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2505to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2506allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2507disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2508generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2509as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2510with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2511GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2512information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2513option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2514section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2515when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2516image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2517[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2518
252b5132
RH
2519@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2520@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2521@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2522@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2523If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2524do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2525only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2526resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2527undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2528@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2529to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2530warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2531import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2532to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2533feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2534@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2535mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2536[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2537
522f09cd
KT
2538@kindex --leading-underscore
2539@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2540@item --leading-underscore
2541@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2542For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2543in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2544disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2545
252b5132
RH
2546@cindex DLLs, creating
2547@kindex --export-all-symbols
2548@item --export-all-symbols
2549If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2550be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2551otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2552explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2553attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2554option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2555@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2556@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2557exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2558re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2559such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2560@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2561@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2562Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2563not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2564extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2565(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2566These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2567@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2568@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2569@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2570@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2571[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2572
2573@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2574@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2575Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2576exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2578
2927aaca
NC
2579@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2580@item --exclude-all-symbols
2581Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
252b5132
RH
2584@kindex --file-alignment
2585@item --file-alignment
2586Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2587file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2588512.
bb10df36 2589[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2590
2591@cindex heap size
2592@kindex --heap
2593@item --heap @var{reserve}
2594@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2595Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2596to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2597committed.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2599
2600@cindex image base
2601@kindex --image-base
2602@item --image-base @var{value}
2603Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2604the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2605is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2606your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2607other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2608for dlls.
bb10df36 2609[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2610
2611@kindex --kill-at
2612@item --kill-at
2613If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2614symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2616
26d2d8a2
BF
2617@kindex --large-address-aware
2618@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2619If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2620header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2621greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2622or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2623section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2624[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2625
f69a2f97
NC
2626@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2627@item --disable-large-address-aware
2628Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2629This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2630driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2631addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2632[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2633
252b5132
RH
2634@kindex --major-image-version
2635@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2636Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2638
2639@kindex --major-os-version
2640@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2641Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2642[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2643
2644@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2645@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2646Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2647[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2648
2649@kindex --minor-image-version
2650@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2651Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2652[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2653
2654@kindex --minor-os-version
2655@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2656Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2657[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2658
2659@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2660@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2661Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2662[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2663
2664@cindex DEF files, creating
2665@cindex DLLs, creating
2666@kindex --output-def
2667@item --output-def @var{file}
2668The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2669file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2670(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2671library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2672automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2674
b044cda1 2675@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2676@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2677@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2678@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2679Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2680@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2681By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2682for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2683execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2684[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2685
2686@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2687@item --disable-auto-image-base
2688Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2689user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2690default.
bb10df36 2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2692
2693@cindex DLLs, linking to
2694@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2695@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2696When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2697search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2698@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2699between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2700uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2701@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2702[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2703
2704@kindex --enable-auto-import
2705@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2706Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2707DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2708building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2709'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2710to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2711specification published by Microsoft.
2712
e2a83dd0
NC
2713Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2714data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2715placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2716around a problem with consts that is described here:
2717http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2718
4d8907ac
DS
2719Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2720see this message:
0d888aac 2721
ece2d90e 2722"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2723documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2724
ece2d90e
NC
2725This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2726ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2727allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2728fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2729constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2730multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2731this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2732of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2733the warning, and exit.
2734
2735There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2736data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2737
2fa9fc65
NC
2738One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2739of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2740this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2741
c0065db7
RM
2742A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2743that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2744there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2745a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2746
2747@example
2748extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2749extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2750 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2751@end example
2752
2753or
2754
2755@example
2756extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2757extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2758 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2759@end example
2760
c0065db7 2761For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2762is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2763
2764@example
2765extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2766extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2767 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2768@end example
2769
c406afaf
NC
2770or
2771
2772@example
2773extern long long extern_ll;
2774extern_ll -->
2775 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2776@end example
2777
2fa9fc65 2778A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2779'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2780@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2781requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2782building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2783merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2784between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2785constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2786
2787Original:
2788@example
2789--foo.h
2790extern int arr[];
2791--foo.c
2792#include "foo.h"
2793void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2794 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2795@}
2796@end example
2797
2798Solution 1:
2799@example
2800--foo.h
2801extern int arr[];
2802--foo.c
2803#include "foo.h"
2804void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2805 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2806 volatile int *parr = arr;
2807 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2808@}
2809@end example
2810
2811Solution 2:
2812@example
2813--foo.h
2814/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2815#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2816 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2817#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2818#else
2819#define FOO_IMPORT
2820#endif
2821extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2822--foo.c
2823#include "foo.h"
2824void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2825 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2826@}
2827@end example
2828
c0065db7 2829A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2830library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2831for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2832functions).
bb10df36 2833[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2834
2835@kindex --disable-auto-import
2836@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2837Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2838@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2839[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2840
2fa9fc65
NC
2841@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2842@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2843If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2844that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2845a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2846environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2847[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2848
2849@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2850@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2851Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2852DLLs.
bb10df36 2853[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2854
b044cda1
CW
2855@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2856@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2857Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2858[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2859
252b5132
RH
2860@kindex --section-alignment
2861@item --section-alignment
2862Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2863addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2864[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2865
2866@cindex stack size
2867@kindex --stack
2868@item --stack @var{reserve}
2869@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2870Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2871to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2872committed.
bb10df36 2873[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2874
2875@kindex --subsystem
2876@item --subsystem @var{which}
2877@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2878@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2879Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2880legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2881@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2882the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2883@var{which}.
bb10df36 2884[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2885
2f563b51
DK
2886The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2887of the PE file header:
2888[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2889
2d5c3743
NC
2890@kindex --high-entropy-va
2891@item --high-entropy-va
2892Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2893(ASLR).
2894
2f563b51
DK
2895@kindex --dynamicbase
2896@item --dynamicbase
2897The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2898randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2899Vista for i386 PE targets.
2900
2901@kindex --forceinteg
2902@item --forceinteg
2903Code integrity checks are enforced.
2904
2905@kindex --nxcompat
2906@item --nxcompat
2907The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2908This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2909
2910@kindex --no-isolation
2911@item --no-isolation
2912Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2913
2914@kindex --no-seh
2915@item --no-seh
2916The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2917this image.
2918
2919@kindex --no-bind
2920@item --no-bind
2921Do not bind this image.
2922
2923@kindex --wdmdriver
2924@item --wdmdriver
2925The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2926
2f563b51
DK
2927@kindex --tsaware
2928@item --tsaware
2929The image is Terminal Server aware.
2930
0cb112f7
CF
2931@kindex --insert-timestamp
2932@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2933@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2934Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2935as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2936other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2937will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2938same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2939can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2940that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2941identically.
252b5132
RH
2942@end table
2943
0285c67d
NC
2944@c man end
2945
ac145307
BS
2946@ifset C6X
2947@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2948
2949@c man begin OPTIONS
2950
2951The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2952libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2953all executables use an index of 0.
2954
2955@table @gcctabopt
2956
2957@kindex --dsbt-size
2958@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2959This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2960or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2961entries.
2962
2963@kindex --dsbt-index
2964@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2965This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2966to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2967executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2968@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2969
fbd9ad90
PB
2970@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2971The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2972exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2973
ac145307
BS
2974@end table
2975
2976@c man end
2977@end ifset
2978
93fd0973
SC
2979@ifset M68HC11
2980@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2981
2982@c man begin OPTIONS
2983
2984The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2985memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2986
2987@table @gcctabopt
2988
2989@kindex --no-trampoline
2990@item --no-trampoline
2991This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2992is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2993instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2994
2995@kindex --bank-window
2996@item --bank-window @var{name}
2997This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2998the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2999The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3000paging and addresses within the memory window.
3001
3002@end table
3003
3004@c man end
3005@end ifset
3006
7fb9f789
NC
3007@ifset M68K
3008@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3009
3010@c man begin OPTIONS
3011
3012The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3013when linking for 68K targets.
3014
3015@table @gcctabopt
3016
3017@kindex --got
3018@item --got=@var{type}
3019This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3020@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3021@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3022Info entry for @file{ld}.
3023
3024@end table
3025
3026@c man end
3027@end ifset
3028
833794fc
MR
3029@ifset MIPS
3030@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3031
3032@c man begin OPTIONS
3033
3034The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3035generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3036linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3037
3038@table @gcctabopt
3039
3040@kindex --insn32
3041@item --insn32
3042@kindex --no-insn32
3043@itemx --no-insn32
3044These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3045generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3046or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
304732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3048used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3049possible.
3050
8b10b0b3
MR
3051@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3052@item --ignore-branch-isa
3053@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3054@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3055These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3056transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3057accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3058is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3059instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3060equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3061calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3062a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3063an error.
3064
833794fc
MR
3065@end table
3066
3067@c man end
3068@end ifset
3069
252b5132
RH
3070@ifset UsesEnvVars
3071@node Environment
3072@section Environment Variables
3073
0285c67d
NC
3074@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3075
560e09e9 3076You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3077@ifclear SingleFormat
3078@code{GNUTARGET},
3079@end ifclear
3080@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3081
36f63dca 3082@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3083@kindex GNUTARGET
3084@cindex default input format
3085@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3086use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3087of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3088@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3089of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3090attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3091this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3092there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3093object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3094BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3095in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3096@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3097
3098@kindex LDEMULATION
3099@cindex default emulation
3100@cindex emulation, default
3101@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3102@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3103behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3104available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3105the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3106variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3107linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3108
3109@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3110@cindex demangling, default
3111Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3112@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3113default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3114a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3115may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3116options.
3117
0285c67d
NC
3118@c man end
3119@end ifset
3120
252b5132
RH
3121@node Scripts
3122@chapter Linker Scripts
3123
3124@cindex scripts
3125@cindex linker scripts
3126@cindex command files
3127Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3128written in the linker command language.
3129
3130The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3131the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3132the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3133more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3134direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3135described below.
3136
3137The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3138yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3139linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3140to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3141such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3142
3143You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3144line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3145default linker script.
3146
3147You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3148to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3149Linker Scripts}.
3150
3151@menu
3152* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3153* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3154* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3155* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3156* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3157* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3158* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3159* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3160* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3161* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3162* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3163@end menu
3164
3165@node Basic Script Concepts
3166@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3167@cindex linker script concepts
3168We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3169describe the linker script language.
3170
3171The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3172file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3173@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3174The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3175purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3176among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3177section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3178in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3179
3180Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3181also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3182contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3183the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3184A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3185area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3186loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3187which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3188of debugging information.
3189
3190Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3191first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3192the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3193@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3194section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3195same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3196is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3197(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3198based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3199RAM address would be the VMA.
3200
3201You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3202program with the @samp{-h} option.
3203
3204Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3205@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3206has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3207information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3208will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3209static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3210referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3211
3212You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3213program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3214option.
3215
3216@node Script Format
3217@section Linker Script Format
3218@cindex linker script format
3219Linker scripts are text files.
3220
3221You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3222either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3223symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3224generally ignored.
3225
3226Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3227If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3228otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3229double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3230file name.
3231
3232You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3233@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3234to whitespace.
3235
3236@node Simple Example
3237@section Simple Linker Script Example
3238@cindex linker script example
3239@cindex example of linker script
3240Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3241
3242The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3243@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3244memory layout of the output file.
3245
3246The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3247describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3248code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3249@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3250Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3251your input files.
3252
3253For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32540x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3255linker script which will do that:
3256@smallexample
3257SECTIONS
3258@{
3259 . = 0x10000;
3260 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3261 . = 0x8000000;
3262 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3263 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3264@}
3265@end smallexample
3266
3267You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3268followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3269descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3270
252b5132
RH
3271The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3272sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3273counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3274other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3275current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3276incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3277@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3278
3279The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3280required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3281after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3282which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3283wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3284means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3285
3286Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3287@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3288@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3289
3290The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3291the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3292at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3293output section, the value of the location counter will be
3294@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3295effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3296immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3297
3298The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3299alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3300example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3301sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3302may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3303sections.
3304
3305That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3306
3307@node Simple Commands
3308@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3309@cindex linker script simple commands
3310In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3311
3312@menu
3313* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3314* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3315@ifclear SingleFormat
3316* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3317@end ifclear
3318
4a93e180 3319* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3320* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3321@end menu
3322
3323@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3324@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3325@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3326@cindex start of execution
3327@cindex first instruction
3328@cindex entry point
3329The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3330point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3331entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3332@smallexample
3333ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3334@end smallexample
3335
3336There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3337entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3338stopping when one of them succeeds:
3339@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3340@item
252b5132 3341the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3342@item
252b5132 3343the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3344@item
3ab904c4
NC
3345the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3346targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3347check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3348@item
252b5132 3349the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3350@item
252b5132
RH
3351The address @code{0}.
3352@end itemize
3353
3354@node File Commands
36f63dca 3355@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3356@cindex linker script file commands
3357Several linker script commands deal with files.
3358
3359@table @code
3360@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3361@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3362@cindex including a linker script
3363Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3364be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3365with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
336610 levels deep.
3367
4006703d
NS
3368You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3369@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3370
252b5132
RH
3371@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3372@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3373@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3374@cindex input files in linker scripts
3375@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3376@cindex linker script input object files
3377The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3378in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3379
3380For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3381a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3382then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3383
3384In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3385script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3386
e3f2db7f
AO
3387In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3388with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3389located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3390for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3391open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3392linker will search through the archive library search path.
3393The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3394as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3395path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3396@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3397
ff5dcc92 3398If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3399name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3400@samp{-l}.
3401
3402When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3403files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3404script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3405
3406@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3407@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3408@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3409@cindex grouping input files
3410The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3411files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3412new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3413in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3414
b717d30e
JJ
3415@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3416@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3417@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3418This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3419commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3420as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3421with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3422when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3423@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3424and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3425setting afterwards.
3426
252b5132
RH
3427@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3428@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3429@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3430The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3431@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3432@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3433Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3434precedence.
3435
3436You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3437output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3438
3439@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3440@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3441@cindex library search path in linker script
3442@cindex archive search path in linker script
3443@cindex search path in linker script
3444The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3445@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3446@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3447on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3448are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3449the command line option are searched first.
3450
3451@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3452@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3453@cindex first input file
3454The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3455that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3456though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3457when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3458first file.
3459@end table
3460
3461@ifclear SingleFormat
3462@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3463@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3464A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3465
3466@table @code
3467@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3468@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3469@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3470@cindex output file format in linker script
3471The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3472output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3473exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3474(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3475line option takes precedence.
3476
3477You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3478formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3479This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3480desired endianness.
3481
3482If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3483will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3484output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3485used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3486
3487For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3488command:
3489@smallexample
3490OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3491@end smallexample
3492This says that the default format for the output file is
3493@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3494option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3495format.
3496
3497@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3498@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3499@cindex input file format in linker script
3500The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3501files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3502This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3503(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3504is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3505command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3506@end table
3507@end ifclear
3508
4a93e180
NC
3509@node REGION_ALIAS
3510@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3511@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3512@cindex region alias
3513@cindex region names
3514
3515Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3516@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3517
3518@smallexample
3519REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3520@end smallexample
3521
3522The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3523memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3524to memory regions. An example follows.
3525
3526Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3527memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3528that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3529non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3530access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3531read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3532sections:
3533
3534@itemize @bullet
3535@item
3536@code{.text} program code;
3537@item
3538@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3539@item
3540@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3541@item
3542@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3543@end itemize
3544
3545The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3546part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3547output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3548systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3549@code{C}:
3550@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3551@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3552@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3553@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3554@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3555@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3556@end multitable
3557The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3558loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3559the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3560the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3561
3562The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3563includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3564memory layout:
3565@smallexample
3566INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3567
3568SECTIONS
3569 @{
3570 .text :
3571 @{
3572 *(.text)
3573 @} > REGION_TEXT
3574 .rodata :
3575 @{
3576 *(.rodata)
3577 rodata_end = .;
3578 @} > REGION_RODATA
3579 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3580 @{
3581 data_start = .;
3582 *(.data)
3583 @} > REGION_DATA
3584 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3585 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3586 .bss :
3587 @{
3588 *(.bss)
3589 @} > REGION_BSS
3590 @}
3591@end smallexample
3592
3593Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3594regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3595variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3596@table @code
3597@item A
3598Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3599@smallexample
3600MEMORY
3601 @{
3602 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3603 @}
3604
3605REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3606REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3607REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3608REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3609@end smallexample
3610@item B
3611Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3612into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3613@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3614@smallexample
3615MEMORY
3616 @{
3617 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3618 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3619 @}
3620
3621REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3622REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3623REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3624REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3625@end smallexample
3626@item C
3627Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3628@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3629initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3630system start into the @code{RAM}.
3631@smallexample
3632MEMORY
3633 @{
3634 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3635 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3636 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3637 @}
3638
3639REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3640REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3641REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3642REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3643@end smallexample
3644@end table
3645
3646It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3647@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3648necessary:
3649@smallexample
3650#include <string.h>
3651
3652extern char data_start [];
3653extern char data_size [];
3654extern char data_load_start [];
3655
3656void copy_data(void)
3657@{
3658 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3659 @{
3660 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3661 @}
3662@}
3663@end smallexample
3664
252b5132 3665@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3666@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3667There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3668
3669@table @code
3670@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3671@kindex ASSERT
3672@cindex assertion in linker script
3673Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3674with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3675
fd1c4238
NC
3676Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3677take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3678inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3679for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3680symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3681
3682@smallexample
3683 .stack :
3684 @{
3685 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3686 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3687 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3688 @}
3689@end smallexample
3690
3691will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3692PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3693can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3694
3695@smallexample
3696 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3697 .stack :
3698 @{
3699 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3700 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3701 @}
3702@end smallexample
3703
3704will work.
3705
252b5132
RH
3706@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3707@kindex EXTERN
3708@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3709Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3710symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3711modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3712each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3713command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3714
3715@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3716@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3717@cindex common allocation in linker script
3718This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3719to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3720output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3721
4818e05f
AM
3722@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3723@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3724@cindex common allocation in linker script
3725This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3726command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3727to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3728
53d25da6
AM
3729@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3730@kindex INSERT
3731@cindex insert user script into default script
3732This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3733augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3734inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3735@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3736default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3737sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3738linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3739insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3740linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3741default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3742of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3743to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3744is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3745
3746@smallexample
3747SECTIONS
3748@{
3749 OVERLAY :
3750 @{
3751 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3752 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3753 @}
3754@}
3755INSERT AFTER .text;
3756@end smallexample
3757
252b5132
RH
3758@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3759@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3760@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3761This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3762references among certain output sections.
3763
3764In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3765using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3766will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3767errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3768a function defined in the other section.
3769
3770The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3771@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3772an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3773@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3774names.
3775
cdf96953
MF
3776@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3777@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3778@cindex cross references
3779This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3780references to one section from a list of other sections.
3781
3782The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3783output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3784a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3785there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3786must never call back.
3787
3788The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3789The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3790If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3791the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3792status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3793names, not input section names.
3794
252b5132
RH
3795@ifclear SingleFormat
3796@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3797@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3798@cindex machine architecture
3799@cindex architecture
3800Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3801of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3802architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3803the @samp{-f} option.
3804@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3805
3806@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3807@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3808This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3809@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3810in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3811@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3812@end table
3813
3814@node Assignments
3815@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3816@cindex assignment in scripts
3817@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3818@cindex variables, defining
3819You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3820the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3821
3822@menu
3823* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3824* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3825* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3826* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3827* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3828@end menu
3829
3830@node Simple Assignments
3831@subsection Simple Assignments
3832
3833You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3834
3835@table @code
3836@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3837@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3838@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3839@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3840@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3841@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3842@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3843@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3844@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3845@end table
3846
3847The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3848@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3849defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3850
3851The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3852may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3853
3854The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3855
3856Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3857
3858You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3859statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3860section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3861
3862The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3863expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3864
3865Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3866assignments may be used:
3867
3868@smallexample
3869floating_point = 0;
3870SECTIONS
3871@{
3872 .text :
3873 @{
3874 *(.text)
3875 _etext = .;
3876 @}
156e34dd 3877 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3878 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3879@}
3880@end smallexample
3881@noindent
3882In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3883zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3884the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3885defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3886upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3887
eb8476a6
MR
3888@node HIDDEN
3889@subsection HIDDEN
3890@cindex HIDDEN
3891For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3892exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3893
3894Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3895@code{HIDDEN}:
3896
3897@smallexample
3898HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3899SECTIONS
3900@{
3901 .text :
3902 @{
3903 *(.text)
3904 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3905 @}
3906 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3907 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3908@}
3909@end smallexample
3910@noindent
3911In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3912
252b5132
RH
3913@node PROVIDE
3914@subsection PROVIDE
3915@cindex PROVIDE
3916In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3917only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3918the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3919@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3920@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3921@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3922@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3923@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3924
3925Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3926@smallexample
3927SECTIONS
3928@{
3929 .text :
3930 @{
3931 *(.text)
3932 _etext = .;
3933 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3934 @}
3935@}
3936@end smallexample
3937
3938In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3939underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3940the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3941underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3942If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3943linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3944
7af8e998
L
3945@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3946@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3947@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3948Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3949hidden and won't be exported.
3950
73ae6183
NC
3951@node Source Code Reference
3952@subsection Source Code Reference
3953
3954Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3955intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3956a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3957symbol that does not have a value.
3958
3959Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3960transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3961stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3962prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3963mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3964of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3965variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3966linker script variable might be referred to as:
3967
3968@smallexample
3969 extern int foo;
3970@end smallexample
3971
3972But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3973
3974@smallexample
3975 _foo = 1000;
3976@end smallexample
3977
3978In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3979transformation has taken place.
3980
3981When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3982things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3983in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3984second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3985table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3986contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3987value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3988
3989@smallexample
3990 int foo = 1000;
3991@end smallexample
3992
10bf6894 3993creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3994holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3995number 1000 is initially stored.
3996
3997When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3998first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3999memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4000So:
4001
4002@smallexample
4003 foo = 1;
4004@end smallexample
4005
4006looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4007associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4008address. Whereas:
4009
4010@smallexample
4011 int * a = & foo;
4012@end smallexample
4013
10bf6894 4014looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4015and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4016the variable @samp{a}.
4017
4018Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4019the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4020an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4021
4022@smallexample
4023 foo = 1000;
4024@end smallexample
4025
4026creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4027the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4028address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4029linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4030access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4031
4032Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4033you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4034use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4035section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4036linker script contains these declarations:
4037
4038@smallexample
4039@group
4040 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4041 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4042 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4043@end group
4044@end smallexample
4045
4046Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4047
4048@smallexample
4049@group
4050 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4051
73ae6183
NC
4052 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4053@end group
4054@end smallexample
4055
4056Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4057Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4058arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4059
4060@smallexample
4061@group
4062 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4063
4064 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4065@end group
4066@end smallexample
4067
4068Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4069operators.
73ae6183 4070
252b5132 4071@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4072@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4073@kindex SECTIONS
4074The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4075into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4076
4077The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4078@smallexample
4079SECTIONS
4080@{
4081 @var{sections-command}
4082 @var{sections-command}
4083 @dots{}
4084@}
4085@end smallexample
4086
4087Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4088
4089@itemize @bullet
4090@item
4091an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4092@item
4093a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4094@item
4095an output section description
4096@item
4097an overlay description
4098@end itemize
4099
4100The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4101@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4102those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4103understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4104the layout of the output file.
4105
4106Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4107below.
4108
4109If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4110linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4111section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4112input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4113example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4114in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4115
4116@menu
4117* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4118* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4119* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4120* Input Section:: Input section description
4121* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4122* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4123* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4124* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4125* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4126@end menu
4127
4128@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4129@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4130The full description of an output section looks like this:
4131@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4132@group
7e7d5768 4133@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4134 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4135 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4136 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4137 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4138 @{
4139 @var{output-section-command}
4140 @var{output-section-command}
4141 @dots{}
abc9061b 4142 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4143@end group
4144@end smallexample
4145
4146Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4147
4148The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4149name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4150The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4151the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4152The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4153
4154Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4155
4156@itemize @bullet
4157@item
4158a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4159@item
4160an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4161@item
4162data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4163@item
4164a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4165@end itemize
4166
4167@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4168@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4169@cindex name, section
4170@cindex section name
4171The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4172meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4173support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4174must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4175example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4176output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4177names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4178quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4179characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4180commas must be quoted.
4181
4182The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4183Discarding}.
4184
4185@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4186@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4187@cindex address, section
4188@cindex section address
4189The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4190address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4191is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4192
4193If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4194section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4195to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4196alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4197contained within the output section.
4198
4199The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4200
4201@itemize @bullet
4202@item
4203If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4204is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4205in that region.
4206
4207@item
4208If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4209regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4210section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4211be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4212
4213@item
4214If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4215the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4216counter.
4217@end itemize
4218
4219@noindent
4220For example:
4221
252b5132
RH
4222@smallexample
4223.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4224@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4225
252b5132
RH
4226@noindent
4227and
ea5cae92 4228
252b5132
RH
4229@smallexample
4230.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4231@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4232
252b5132
RH
4233@noindent
4234are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4235@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4236counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4237counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4238input sections.
252b5132
RH
4239
4240The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4241For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4242so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4243do something like this:
4244@smallexample
4245.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4246@end smallexample
4247@noindent
4248This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4249aligned upward to the specified value.
4250
4251Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4252location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4253sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4254
4255@node Input Section
36f63dca 4256@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4257@cindex input sections
4258@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4259The most common output section command is an input section description.
4260
4261The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4262You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4263in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4264map the input files into your memory layout.
4265
4266@menu
4267* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4268* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4269* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4270* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4271* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4272@end menu
4273
4274@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4275@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4276@cindex input section basics
4277An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4278by a list of section names in parentheses.
4279
4280The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4281describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4282
4283The most common input section description is to include all input
4284sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4285include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4286@smallexample
4287*(.text)
4288@end smallexample
4289@noindent
18625d54 4290Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4291@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4292of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4293match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4294example:
252b5132 4295@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4296EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4297@end smallexample
4298@noindent
4299will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4300and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4301placed inside the section list, for example:
4302@smallexample
b4346c09 4303*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4304@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4305@noindent
4306The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4307two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4308more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4309
4310There are two ways to include more than one section:
4311@smallexample
4312*(.text .rdata)
4313*(.text) *(.rdata)
4314@end smallexample
4315@noindent
4316The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4317@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4318first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4319they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4320@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4321@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4322
8f1732fc
AB
4323When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4324is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4325immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4326@smallexample
4327*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4328@end smallexample
4329@noindent
4330will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4331@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4332from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4333exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4334could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4335@smallexample
4336*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4337@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4338@noindent
4339Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4340before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4341all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4342@smallexample
4343EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4344@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4345
252b5132
RH
4346You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4347You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4348needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4349@smallexample
4350data.o(.data)
4351@end smallexample
4352
ae17ab41
CM
4353To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4354of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4355
4356Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4357
4358@smallexample
4359@group
4360SECTIONS @{
4361 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4362 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4363@}
4364@end group
4365@end smallexample
4366
4367In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4368input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4369@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4370@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4371whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4372
967928e9
AM
4373You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4374matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4375with no whitespace around the colon.
4376
4377@table @samp
4378@item archive:file
4379matches file within archive
4380@item archive:
4381matches the whole archive
4382@item :file
4383matches file but not one in an archive
4384@end table
4385
4386Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4387wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4388single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4389@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4390within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4391also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4392other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4393from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4394command.
4395
252b5132
RH
4396If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4397the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4398commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4399@smallexample
4400data.o
4401@end smallexample
4402
967928e9
AM
4403When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4404and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4405characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4406name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4407did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4408though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4409@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4410the archive search path.
4411
4412@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4413@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4414@cindex input section wildcards
4415@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4416@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4417@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4418In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4419name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4420
4421The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4422pattern for the file name.
4423
4424The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4425
4426@table @samp
4427@item *
4428matches any number of characters
4429@item ?
4430matches any single character
4431@item [@var{chars}]
4432matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4433character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4434@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4435@item \
4436quotes the following character
4437@end table
4438
4439When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4440will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4441Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4442exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4443@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4444a @samp{/} character.
4445
4446File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4447specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4448does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4449
4450If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4451appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4452will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4453sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4454@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4455@smallexample
4456.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4457.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4458@end smallexample
4459
bcaa7b3e 4460@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4461Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4462in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4463this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4464pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4465@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4466into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4467
bcaa7b3e
L
4468@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4469@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4470difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4471descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4472Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4473reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4474
02ecc8e9
L
4475@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4476@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4477difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4478ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4479encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4480
bcaa7b3e
L
4481@cindex SORT
4482@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4483
4484When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4485can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4486
4487@enumerate
4488@item
4489@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4490It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4491sections have the same name.
4492@item
4493@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4494It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4495sections have the same alignment.
4496@item
c0065db7 4497@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4498treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4499@item
4500@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4501is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4502@item
4503All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4504@end enumerate
4505
4506When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4507section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4508takes precedence over the command line option.
4509
4510If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4511command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4512treated as nested sorting command.
4513
4514@enumerate
4515@item
4516@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4517@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4518@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4519@item
4520@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4521@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4522@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4523@end enumerate
4524
4525If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4526command line option will be ignored.
4527
eda680f8
L
4528@cindex SORT_NONE
4529@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4530section sorting option.
4531
252b5132
RH
4532If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4533@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4534precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4535
4536This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4537files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4538sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4539The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4540with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4541linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4542@smallexample
4543@group
4544SECTIONS @{
4545 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4546 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4547 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4548 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4549@}
4550@end group
4551@end smallexample
4552
4553@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4554@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4555@cindex common symbol placement
4556@cindex uninitialized data placement
4557A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4558file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4559linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4560named @samp{COMMON}.
4561
4562You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4563other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4564particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4565input files are placed in another section.
4566
4567In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4568@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4569@smallexample
4570.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4571@end smallexample
4572
4573@cindex scommon section
4574@cindex small common symbols
4575Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4576example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4577symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4578different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4579the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4580symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4581to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4582locations.
4583
4584@cindex [COMMON]
4585You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4586notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4587@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4588
4589@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4590@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4591@cindex KEEP
4592@cindex garbage collection
4593When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4594it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4595This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4596with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4597@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4598
4599@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4600@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4601The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4602to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4603start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4604@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4605follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4606@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4607@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4608All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4609files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4610
4611@smallexample
4612@group
4613SECTIONS @{
4614 outputa 0x10000 :
4615 @{
4616 all.o
4617 foo.o (.input1)
4618 @}
36f63dca
NC
4619@end group
4620@group
252b5132
RH
4621 outputb :
4622 @{
4623 foo.o (.input2)
4624 foo1.o (.input1)
4625 @}
36f63dca
NC
4626@end group
4627@group
252b5132
RH
4628 outputc :
4629 @{
4630 *(.input1)
4631 *(.input2)
4632 @}
4633@}
4634@end group
a1ab1d2a 4635@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4636
4637@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4638@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4639@cindex data
4640@cindex section data
4641@cindex output section data
4642@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4643@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4644@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4645@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4646@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4647You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4648@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4649an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4650parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4651value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4652counter.
4653
4654The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4655store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4656bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4657stored.
4658
4659For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4660of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4661@smallexample
4662BYTE(1)
4663LONG(addr)
4664@end smallexample
4665
4666When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4667same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4668target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4669@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4670@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4671
4672If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4673which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4674When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4675true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4676endianness of the first input object file.
4677
36f63dca 4678Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4679between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4680@smallexample
4681SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4682@end smallexample
4683whereas this will work:
4684@smallexample
4685SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4686@end smallexample
4687
252b5132
RH
4688@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4689@cindex holes, filling
4690@cindex unspecified memory
4691You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4692current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4693otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4694gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4695with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4696necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4697point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4698than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4699different parts of an output section.
4700
4701This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4702value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4703@smallexample
563e308f 4704FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4705@end smallexample
4706
4707The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4708section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4709part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4710entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4711precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4712expression.
252b5132
RH
4713
4714@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4715@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4716There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4717commands.
4718
4719@table @code
4720@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4721@cindex input filename symbols
4722@cindex filename symbols
4723@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4724The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4725The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4726file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4727the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4728
4729This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4730normally used for any other object file format.
4731
4732@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4733@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4734@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4735@item CONSTRUCTORS
4736When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4737unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4738destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4739arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4740automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4741For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4742linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4743@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4744ignored for other object file formats.
4745
4746The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4747constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4748Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4749the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4750first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4751of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4752compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4753formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4754@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4755the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4756destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4757@code{exit}.
4758
4759For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4760arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4761addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4762and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4763linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4764runtime code expects to see.
4765
4766@smallexample
4767 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4768 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4769 *(.ctors)
4770 LONG(0)
4771 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4772 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4773 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4774 *(.dtors)
4775 LONG(0)
4776 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4777@end smallexample
4778
4779If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4780which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4781are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4782are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4783command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4784@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4785@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4786@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4787
4788Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4789and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4790need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4791scripts.
4792
4793@end table
4794
4795@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4796@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4797@cindex discarding sections
4798@cindex sections, discarding
4799@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4800The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4801This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4802may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4803@smallexample
49c13adb 4804.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4805@end smallexample
4806@noindent
4807will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4808@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4809sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4810space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4811too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4812space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4813@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4814@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4815This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4816
a0976ea4 4817The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4818on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4819symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4820the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4821section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4822
4823@cindex /DISCARD/
4824The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4825input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4826section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4827
4828@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4829@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4830@cindex output section attributes
4831We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4832like this:
0c71d759 4833
252b5132 4834@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4835@group
7e7d5768 4836@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4837 [AT(@var{lma})]
4838 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4839 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4840 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4841 @{
4842 @var{output-section-command}
4843 @var{output-section-command}
4844 @dots{}
562d3460 4845 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4846@end group
4847@end smallexample
0c71d759 4848
252b5132
RH
4849We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4850@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4851remaining section attributes.
4852
a1ab1d2a 4853@menu
252b5132
RH
4854* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4855* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4856* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4857* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4858* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4859* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4860* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4861* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4862@end menu
4863
4864@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4865@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4866Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4867parentheses. The following types are defined:
4868
4869@table @code
4870@item NOLOAD
4871The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4872loaded into memory when the program is run.
4873@item DSECT
4874@itemx COPY
4875@itemx INFO
4876@itemx OVERLAY
4877These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4878rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4879marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4880section when the program is run.
4881@end table
4882
4883@kindex NOLOAD
4884@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4885@cindex loading, preventing
4886The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4887the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4888the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4889@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4890need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4891@smallexample
4892@group
4893SECTIONS @{
4894 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4895 @dots{}
4896@}
4897@end group
4898@end smallexample
4899
4900@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4901@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4902@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4903@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4904@cindex load address
4905@cindex section load address
4906Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4907@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4908@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4909specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4910address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4911
ea5cae92
NC
4912The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4913specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4914takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4915load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4916region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4917
4918If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4919section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4920load address:
4921
4922@itemize @bullet
4923@item
4924If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4925the LMA address as well.
4926
4927@item
4928If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4929
4930@item
4931Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4932with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4933section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4934VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4935the last section in the located region.
4936
4937@item
4938If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4939that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4940
4941@item
4942If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4943section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4944@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4945
4946@cindex ROM initialized data
4947@cindex initialized data in ROM
4948This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4949example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4950called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4951@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4952even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4953uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4954defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4955counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4956
4957@smallexample
4958@group
4959SECTIONS
4960 @{
4961 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4962 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4963 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4964 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4965 .bss 0x3000 :
4966 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4967@}
4968@end group
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4972this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4973the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4974how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4975script.
4976
4977@smallexample
4978@group
4979extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4980char *src = &_etext;
4981char *dst = &_data;
4982
ea5cae92
NC
4983/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4984while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4985 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4986
ea5cae92 4987/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4988for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4989 *dst = 0;
4990@end group
4991@end smallexample
4992
bbf115d3
L
4993@node Forced Output Alignment
4994@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4995@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4996@cindex forcing output section alignment
4997@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4998You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4999alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5000intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5001
7e7d5768
AM
5002@node Forced Input Alignment
5003@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5004@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5005@cindex forcing input section alignment
5006@cindex input section alignment
5007You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5008SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5009sections, whether larger or smaller.
5010
0c71d759
NC
5011@node Output Section Constraint
5012@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5013@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5014@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5015@cindex constraints on output sections
5016You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5017of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5018read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5019@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5020
252b5132 5021@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5022@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5023@kindex >@var{region}
5024@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5025@cindex memory regions and sections
5026You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5027using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5028
5029Here is a simple example:
5030@smallexample
5031@group
5032MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5033SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5034@end group
5035@end smallexample
5036
5037@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5038@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5039@kindex :@var{phdr}
5040@cindex section, assigning to program header
5041@cindex program headers and sections
5042You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5043using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5044one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5045assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5046@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5047linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5048
5049Here is a simple example:
5050@smallexample
5051@group
5052PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5053SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5054@end group
5055@end smallexample
5056
5057@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5058@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5059@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5060@cindex section fill pattern
5061@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5062You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5063@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5064(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5065within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5066alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5067necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5068of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5069an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5070fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5071other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5072pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5073expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5074
5075You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5076output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5077
5078Here is a simple example:
5079@smallexample
5080@group
563e308f 5081SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5082@end group
5083@end smallexample
5084
5085@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5086@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5087@kindex OVERLAY
5088@cindex overlays
5089An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5090are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5091the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5092copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5093required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5094can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5095than another.
5096
5097Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5098@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5099output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5100command is as follows:
5101@smallexample
5102@group
5103OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5104 @{
5105 @var{secname1}
5106 @{
5107 @var{output-section-command}
5108 @var{output-section-command}
5109 @dots{}
5110 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5111 @var{secname2}
5112 @{
5113 @var{output-section-command}
5114 @var{output-section-command}
5115 @dots{}
5116 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5117 @dots{}
abc9061b 5118 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5119@end group
5120@end smallexample
5121
5122Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5123section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5124section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5125those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5126except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5127sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5128
abc9061b
CC
5129The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5130the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5131
252b5132
RH
5132The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5133addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5134memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5135whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5136and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5137and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5138
56dd11f0
NC
5139If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5140references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5141the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5142sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5143@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5144
5145For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5146provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5147defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5148@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5149the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5150within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5151symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5152
5153At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5154the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5155
5156Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5157@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5158@smallexample
5159@group
5160 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5161 @{
5162 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5163 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5164 @}
5165@end group
5166@end smallexample
5167@noindent
5168This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5169address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5170@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5171following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5172@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5173@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5174
5175C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5176like the following.
5177
5178@smallexample
5179@group
5180 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5181 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5182 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5183@end group
5184@end smallexample
5185
5186Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5187everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5188example could have been written identically as follows.
5189
5190@smallexample
5191@group
5192 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5193 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5194 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5195 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5196 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5197 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5198 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5199@end group
5200@end smallexample
5201
5202@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5203@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5204@kindex MEMORY
5205@cindex memory regions
5206@cindex regions of memory
5207@cindex allocating memory
5208@cindex discontinuous memory
5209The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5210memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5211
5212The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5213memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5214may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5215can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5216set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5217regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5218around to fit into the available regions.
5219
127fcdff
AB
5220A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5221however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5222specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5223@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5224@smallexample
5225@group
a1ab1d2a 5226MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5227 @{
5228 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5229 @dots{}
5230 @}
5231@end group
5232@end smallexample
5233
5234The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5235region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5236Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5237with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5238must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5239add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5240command.
252b5132
RH
5241
5242@cindex memory region attributes
5243The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5244whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5245not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5246@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5247section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5248the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5249them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5250
5251The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5252@table @samp
5253@item R
5254Read-only section
5255@item W
5256Read/write section
5257@item X
5258Executable section
5259@item A
5260Allocatable section
5261@item I
5262Initialized section
5263@item L
5264Same as @samp{I}
5265@item !
c09e9a8c 5266Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5267@end table
5268
5269If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5270@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5271attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5272in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5273attributes.
5274
5275@kindex ORIGIN =
5276@kindex o =
5277@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5278The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5279the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5280cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5281abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5282@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5283
5284@kindex LENGTH =
5285@kindex len =
5286@kindex l =
5287The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5288region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5289be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5290@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5291
5292In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5293available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5294and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5295linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5296is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5297or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5298explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5299region.
5300
5301@smallexample
5302@group
a1ab1d2a 5303MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5304 @{
5305 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5306 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5307 @}
5308@end group
5309@end smallexample
5310
5311Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5312specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5313@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5314a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5315output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5316was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5317the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5318output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5319region, the linker will issue an error message.
5320
3ec57632 5321It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5322expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5323@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5324
5325@smallexample
5326@group
c0065db7 5327 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5328@end group
5329@end smallexample
5330
252b5132
RH
5331@node PHDRS
5332@section PHDRS Command
5333@kindex PHDRS
5334@cindex program headers
5335@cindex ELF program headers
5336@cindex program segments
5337@cindex segments, ELF
5338The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5339@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5340loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5341program with the @samp{-p} option.
5342
5343When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5344reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5345program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5346This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5347interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5348
5349The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5350in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5351precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5352the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5353not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5354
5355The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5356generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5357ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5358
5359This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5360@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5361
5362@smallexample
5363@group
5364PHDRS
5365@{
5366 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5367 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5368@}
5369@end group
5370@end smallexample
5371
5372The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5373of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5374header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5375with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5376must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5377is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5378
5379Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5380system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5381specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5382sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5383attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5384Section Phdr}.
5385
5386It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5387merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5388repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5389contain the section.
5390
5391If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5392then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5393not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5394convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5395placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5396default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5397segment at all.
5398
5399@kindex FILEHDR
5400@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5401You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5402the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5403The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5404file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5405include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5406segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5407these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5408
5409The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5410value of the keyword.
5411
5412@table @asis
5413@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5414Indicates an unused program header.
5415
5416@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5417Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5418the file.
5419
5420@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5421Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5422
5423@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5424Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5425found.
5426
5427@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5428Indicates a segment holding note information.
5429
5430@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5431A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5432ABI.
5433
5434@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5435Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5436
1a9ccd70
NC
5437@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5438Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5439
252b5132
RH
5440@item @var{expression}
5441An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5442be used for types not defined above.
5443@end table
5444
5445You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5446in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5447@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5448Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5449output section attribute.
5450
5451The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5452which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5453explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5454an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5455header.
5456
5457Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5458headers used on a native ELF system.
5459
5460@example
5461@group
5462PHDRS
5463@{
5464 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5465 interp PT_INTERP ;
5466 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5467 data PT_LOAD ;
5468 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5469@}
5470
5471SECTIONS
5472@{
5473 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5474 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5475 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5476 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5477 @dots{}
5478 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5479 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5480 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5481 @dots{}
5482@}
5483@end group
5484@end example
5485
5486@node VERSION
5487@section VERSION Command
5488@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5489@cindex symbol versions
5490@cindex version script
5491@cindex versions of symbols
5492The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5493only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5494symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5495a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5496shared library.
5497
5498You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5499you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5500also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5501
5502The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5503@smallexample
5504VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5505@end smallexample
5506
5507The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5508Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5509version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5510version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5511version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5512scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5513library.
5514
5515The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5516examples.
5517
5518@smallexample
5519VERS_1.1 @{
5520 global:
5521 foo1;
5522 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5523 old*;
5524 original*;
5525 new*;
252b5132
RH
5526@};
5527
5528VERS_1.2 @{
5529 foo2;
5530@} VERS_1.1;
5531
5532VERS_2.0 @{
5533 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5534 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5535 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5536 "f(int, double)";
5537 @};
252b5132
RH
5538@} VERS_1.2;
5539@end smallexample
5540
5541This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5542version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5543The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5544a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5545of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5546symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5547is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5548in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5549However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5550name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5551
5552Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5553depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5554to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5555
5556Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5557depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5558and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5559
5560When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5561specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5562unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5563unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5564somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5565wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5566wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5567set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5568ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5569
5570The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5571they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5572could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5573However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5574
0f6bf451 5575Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5576in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5577symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5578won't.
5579
5580@smallexample
7c9c73be 5581@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5582@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5583
252b5132
RH
5584When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5585symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5586requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5587shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5588loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5589linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5590application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5591way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5592all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5593search for each symbol reference.
5594
5595The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5596doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5597that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5598functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5599the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5600required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5601that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5602versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5603the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5604
5605There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5606first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5607source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5608script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5609maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5610@smallexample
5611__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5612@end smallexample
5613@noindent
5614in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5615be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5616The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5617@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5618takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5619
5620The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5621function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5622an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5623version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5624linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5625
5626To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5627source file. Here is an example:
5628
5629@smallexample
5630__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5631__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5632__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5633__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5634@end smallexample
5635
5636In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5637unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5638example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5639@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5640
5641When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5642some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5643this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5644@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5645declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5646you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5647
5648If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5649within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5650(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5651specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5652
cb840a31
L
5653You can also specify the language in the version script:
5654
5655@smallexample
5656VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5657@end smallexample
5658
c0065db7 5659The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5660The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5661demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5662patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5663@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5664
86043bbb
MM
5665Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5666described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5667or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5668the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5669whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5670cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5671might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5672should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5673expect when you upgrade.
5674
252b5132
RH
5675@node Expressions
5676@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5677@cindex expressions
5678@cindex arithmetic
5679The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5680that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5681expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5682host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5683
5684You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5685
5686The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5687expressions.
5688
5689@menu
5690* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5691* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5692* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5693* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5694* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5695* Operators:: Operators
5696* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5697* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5698* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5699@end menu
5700
5701@node Constants
5702@subsection Constants
5703@cindex integer notation
5704@cindex constants in linker scripts
5705All constants are integers.
5706
5707As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5708octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5709hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5710@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5711@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5712value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5713
5714@cindex scaled integers
5715@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5716@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5717@cindex suffixes for integers
5718@cindex integer suffixes
5719In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5720constant by
5721@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5722@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5723@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5724@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5725@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5726@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5727@tex
5728${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5729@end tex
5730@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5731respectively. For example, the following
5732all refer to the same quantity:
5733
252b5132 5734@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5735_fourk_1 = 4K;
5736_fourk_2 = 4096;
5737_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5738_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5739@end smallexample
5740
8a308ae8
NC
5741Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5742conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5743
0c71d759
NC
5744@node Symbolic Constants
5745@subsection Symbolic Constants
5746@cindex symbolic constants
5747@kindex CONSTANT
5748It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5749the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5750
5751@table @code
5752@item MAXPAGESIZE
5753@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5754The target's maximum page size.
5755
5756@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5757@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5758The target's default page size.
5759@end table
5760
5761So for example:
5762
5763@smallexample
9d5777a3 5764 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5765@end smallexample
5766
5767will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5768supported by the target.
5769
252b5132
RH
5770@node Symbols
5771@subsection Symbol Names
5772@cindex symbol names
5773@cindex names
5774@cindex quoted symbol names
5775@kindex "
5776Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5777and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5778Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5779specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5780keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5781@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5782"SECTION" = 9;
5783"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5784@end smallexample
5785
5786Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5787to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5788whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5789
ecca9871
L
5790@node Orphan Sections
5791@subsection Orphan Sections
5792@cindex orphan
5793Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5794are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5795script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5796output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5797in which to place the orphaned input section.
5798
5799If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5800an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5801placed at the end of that output section.
5802
5803If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5804sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5805name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5806orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5807one new output section.
5808
5809If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5810then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5811in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5812linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5813attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5814sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5815support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5816
c005eb9e
AB
5817The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5818(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5819output sections an orphan is placed in.
5820
41911f68 5821If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5822the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5823__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5824section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5825orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5826representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5827character.
5828
252b5132
RH
5829@node Location Counter
5830@subsection The Location Counter
5831@kindex .
5832@cindex dot
5833@cindex location counter
5834@cindex current output location
5835The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5836current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5837location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5838within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5839anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5840
5841@cindex holes
5842Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5843moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5844location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5845and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5846doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5847
5848@smallexample
5849SECTIONS
5850@{
5851 output :
5852 @{
5853 file1(.text)
5854 . = . + 1000;
5855 file2(.text)
5856 . += 1000;
5857 file3(.text)
563e308f 5858 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5859@}
5860@end smallexample
5861@noindent
5862In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5863located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5864followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5865@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5866@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5867specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5868
5c6bbab8
NC
5869@cindex dot inside sections
5870Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5871current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5872statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5873absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5874however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5875not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5876
5877@smallexample
5878SECTIONS
5879@{
5880 . = 0x100
5881 .text: @{
5882 *(.text)
5883 . = 0x200
5884 @}
5885 . = 0x500
5886 .data: @{
5887 *(.data)
5888 . += 0x600
5889 @}
5890@}
5891@end smallexample
5892
5893The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5894and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5895the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5896much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5897move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5898and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5899the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5900the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5901
b5666f2f
AM
5902@cindex dot outside sections
5903Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5904output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5905needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5906
5907@smallexample
5908SECTIONS
5909@{
5910 start_of_text = . ;
5911 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5912 end_of_text = . ;
5913
5914 start_of_data = . ;
5915 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5916 end_of_data = . ;
5917@}
5918@end smallexample
5919
5920If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5921not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5922between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5923should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5924blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5925the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5926sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5927statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5928special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5929place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5930as follows:
5931
5932@smallexample
5933SECTIONS
5934@{
5935 start_of_text = . ;
5936 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5937 end_of_text = . ;
5938
5939 start_of_data = . ;
5940 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5941 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5942 end_of_data = . ;
5943@}
5944@end smallexample
5945
5946This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5947@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5948placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5949assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5950a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5951section. So you could write:
5952
5953@smallexample
5954SECTIONS
5955@{
5956 start_of_text = . ;
5957 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5958 end_of_text = . ;
5959
5960 . = . ;
5961 start_of_data = . ;
5962 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5963 end_of_data = . ;
5964@}
5965@end smallexample
5966
5967Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5968@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5969
252b5132
RH
5970@need 2000
5971@node Operators
5972@subsection Operators
5973@cindex operators for arithmetic
5974@cindex arithmetic operators
5975@cindex precedence in expressions
5976The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5977the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5978@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5979@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5980@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5981@smallexample
5982precedence associativity Operators Notes
5983(highest)
59841 left ! - ~ (1)
59852 left * / %
59863 left + -
59874 left >> <<
59885 left == != > < <= >=
59896 left &
59907 left |
59918 left &&
59929 left ||
599310 right ? :
599411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5995(lowest)
5996@end smallexample
5997Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5998(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5999(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6000@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6001@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6002@tex
6003\vskip \baselineskip
6004%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6005\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6006\hrule
6007\halign
6008{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6009height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6010&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6011height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6012\noalign{\hrule}
6013height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6014&highest&&&&&\cr
6015% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6016&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6017&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6018&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6019&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6020&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6021&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6022&7&&left&&|&\cr
6023&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6024&9&&left&&||&\cr
6025&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6026&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6027&lowest&&&&&\cr
6028height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6029\hrule}
6030@end tex
6031@iftex
6032{
6033@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6034@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6035@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6036}
6037@end iftex
6038@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6039
6040@node Evaluation
6041@subsection Evaluation
6042@cindex lazy evaluation
6043@cindex expression evaluation order
6044The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6045an expression when absolutely necessary.
6046
6047The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6048address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6049regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6050as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6051
6052However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6053until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6054other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6055for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6056
6057The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6058assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6059allocation.
6060
6061Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6062@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6063
6064If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6065available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6066following
6067@smallexample
6068@group
6069SECTIONS
6070 @{
a1ab1d2a 6071 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6072 @{ *(.text) @}
6073 @}
6074@end group
6075@end smallexample
6076@noindent
6077will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6078address}.
6079
6080@node Expression Section
6081@subsection The Section of an Expression
6082@cindex expression sections
6083@cindex absolute expressions
6084@cindex relative expressions
6085@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6086@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6087@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6088Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6089relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6090using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6091value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6092symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6093operations.
6094
abf4be64
AM
6095Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6096section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6097address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6098@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6099functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6100One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6101(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6102differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6103versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6104section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6105Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6106absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6107given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6108everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6109
6110In the following simple example,
252b5132 6111
7542af2a
AM
6112@smallexample
6113@group
6114SECTIONS
6115 @{
6116 . = 0x100;
6117 __executable_start = 0x100;
6118 .data :
6119 @{
6120 . = 0x10;
6121 __data_start = 0x10;
6122 *(.data)
6123 @}
6124 @dots{}
6125 @}
6126@end group
6127@end smallexample
252b5132 6128
7542af2a
AM
6129both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6130address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6131@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6132section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6133
5c3049d2
AM
6134For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6135addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6136
6137@itemize @bullet
6138@item
c05f749e
AM
6139Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6140operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6141absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6142@item
7542af2a
AM
6143Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6144relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6145and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6146@item
c05f749e
AM
6147Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6148in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6149address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6150before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6151@end itemize
6152
6153The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6154
6155@itemize @bullet
6156@item
6157An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6158@item
6159The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6160@item
9bc8bb33 6161The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6162relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6163(after above conversions) is also a number when
6164@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6165but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6166@item
6167The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6168relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6169section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6170@item
6171The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6172conversions) is an absolute address.
6173@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6174
6175You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6176to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6177create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6178section @samp{.data}:
6179@smallexample
6180SECTIONS
6181 @{
6182 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6183 @}
6184@end smallexample
6185@noindent
6186If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6187@samp{.data} section.
6188
7542af2a
AM
6189Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6190particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6191
252b5132
RH
6192@node Builtin Functions
6193@subsection Builtin Functions
6194@cindex functions in expressions
6195The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6196use in linker script expressions.
6197
6198@table @code
6199@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6200@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6201@cindex expression, absolute
6202Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6203of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6204value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6205normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6206
6207@item ADDR(@var{section})
6208@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6209@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6210Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6211script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6212the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6213@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6214@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6215the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6216@smallexample
6217@group
6218SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6219 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6220 @{
252b5132
RH
6221 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6222 @dots{}
6223 @}
6224 .output :
6225 @{
6226 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6227 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6228 @}
6229@dots{} @}
6230@end group
6231@end smallexample
6232
876f4090
NS
6233@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6234@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6235@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6236@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6237@cindex round up location counter
6238@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6239@cindex round up expression
6240@cindex align expression
6241Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6242to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6243doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6244arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6245expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6246equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6247
6248Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6249next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6250variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6251input sections:
252b5132
RH
6252@smallexample
6253@group
6254SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6255 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6256 *(.data)
6257 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6258 @}
6259@dots{} @}
6260@end group
6261@end smallexample
6262@noindent
6263The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6264a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6265a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6266of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6267
6268The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6269
362c1d1a
NS
6270@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6271@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6272@cindex section alignment
6273Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6274been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6275evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6276the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6277value in that section.
6278@smallexample
6279@group
6280SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6281 .output @{
6282 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6283 @dots{}
6284 @}
6285@dots{} @}
6286@end group
6287@end smallexample
6288
252b5132
RH
6289@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6290@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6291This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6292scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6293section.
6294
2d20f7bf
JJ
6295@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6296@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6297This is equivalent to either
6298@smallexample
6299(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6300@end smallexample
6301or
6302@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6303(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6304 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6305@end smallexample
6306@noindent
6307depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6308for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6309@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6310If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6311memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6312bytes in the on-disk file.
6313
6314This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6315any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6316@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6317be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6318working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6319
6320@noindent
6321Example:
6322@smallexample
6323 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6324@end smallexample
6325
6326@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6327@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6328This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6329evaluation purposes.
6330
6331@smallexample
6332 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6333@end smallexample
6334
a4f5ad88
JJ
6335@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6336@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6337This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6338@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6339When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6340does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6341@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6342boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6343it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6344@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6345padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6346section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6347
6348@smallexample
6349 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6350@end smallexample
6351
252b5132
RH
6352@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6353@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6354@cindex symbol defaults
6355Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6356defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6357return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6358default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6359shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6360the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6361existed, its value is preserved:
6362
6363@smallexample
6364@group
6365SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6366 .text : @{
6367 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6368 @dots{}
6369 @}
6370 @dots{}
6371@}
6372@end group
6373@end smallexample
6374
3ec57632
NC
6375@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6376@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6377Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6378
252b5132
RH
6379@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6380@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6381@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6382Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6383Section LMA}).
6384
2e53f7d6
NC
6385@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6386@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6387Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6388@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6389
252b5132
RH
6390@kindex MAX
6391@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6392Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6393
6394@kindex MIN
6395@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6396Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6397
6398@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6399@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6400@cindex unallocated address, next
6401Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6402This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6403use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6404output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6405
3ec57632
NC
6406@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6407@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6408Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6409
ba916c8a
MM
6410@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6411@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6412Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6413value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6414@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6415will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6416can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6417``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6418name.
6419
252b5132
RH
6420@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6421@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6422@cindex section size
6423Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6424been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6425evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6426@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6427@smallexample
6428@group
6429SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6430 .output @{
6431 .start = . ;
6432 @dots{}
6433 .end = . ;
6434 @}
6435 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6436 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6437@dots{} @}
6438@end group
6439@end smallexample
6440
6441@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6442@itemx sizeof_headers
6443@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6444@cindex header size
6445Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6446information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6447this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6448choose, to facilitate paging.
6449
6450@cindex not enough room for program headers
6451@cindex program headers, not enough room
6452When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6453@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6454number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6455addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6456additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6457room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6458the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6459script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6460you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6461command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6462@end table
6463
6464@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6465@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6466@cindex implicit linker scripts
6467If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6468an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6469linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6470linker will report an error.
6471
6472An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6473
6474Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6475assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6476commands.
6477
6478Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6479at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6480read. This can affect archive searching.
6481
6482@ifset GENERIC
6483@node Machine Dependent
6484@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6485
6486@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6487@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6488sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6489functionality are not listed.
6490
6491@menu
36f63dca
NC
6492@ifset H8300
6493* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6494@end ifset
6495@ifset I960
6496* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6497@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6498@ifset M68HC11
6499* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6500@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6501@ifset ARM
6502* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6503@end ifset
6504@ifset HPPA
6505* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6506@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6507@ifset M68K
6508* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6509@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6510@ifset MIPS
6511* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6512@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6513@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6514* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6515@end ifset
2469cfa2 6516@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6517* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6518@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6519@ifset NDS32
6520* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6521@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6522@ifset NIOSII
6523* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6524@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6525@ifset POWERPC
6526* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6527@end ifset
6528@ifset POWERPC64
6529* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6530@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6531@ifset SPU
6532* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6533@end ifset
74459f0e 6534@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6535* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6536@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6537@ifset WIN32
6538* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6539@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6540@ifset XTENSA
6541* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6542@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6543@end menu
6544@end ifset
6545
252b5132
RH
6546@ifset H8300
6547@ifclear GENERIC
6548@raisesections
6549@end ifclear
6550
6551@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6552@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6553
6554@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6555For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6556you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6557
6558@table @emph
6559@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6560@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6561@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6562targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6563program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6564respectively.
6565
6566@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6567@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6568@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6569@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6570sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6571page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6572(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6573@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6574top page of memory).
1502569c 6575
81f5558e
NC
6576@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6577indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6578displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6579the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6580@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6581whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6582range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6583
1502569c 6584@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6585@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6586biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6587which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6588page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6589(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6590@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6591the top page of memory).
6592
6593@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6594@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
659532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6596changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6597(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6598@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6599the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6600@end table
6601
6602@ifclear GENERIC
6603@lowersections
6604@end ifclear
6605@end ifset
6606
36f63dca 6607@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6608@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6609@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6610@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6611@node Renesas
6612@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6613
c2dcd04e
NC
6614@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6615H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6616options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6617@end ifset
6618@end ifclear
6619
6620@ifset I960
6621@ifclear GENERIC
6622@raisesections
6623@end ifclear
6624
6625@node i960
6626@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6627
6628@cindex i960 support
6629
6630You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6631specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6632family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6633incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6634linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6635libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6636search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6637
6638For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6639well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6640paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6641the names
6642
6643@smallexample
6644@group
6645try
6646libtry.a
6647tryca
6648libtryca.a
6649@end group
6650@end smallexample
6651
6652@noindent
6653The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6654two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6655
6656You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6657the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6658use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6659specifies a library.
6660
6661@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6662@cindex relaxing on i960
6663@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6664you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6665@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6666them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6667instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6668instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6669target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6670not itself call any subroutines).
6671
6672@ifclear GENERIC
6673@lowersections
6674@end ifclear
6675@end ifset
6676
6677@ifset ARM
6678@ifclear GENERIC
6679@raisesections
6680@end ifclear
6681
93fd0973
SC
6682@ifset M68HC11
6683@ifclear GENERIC
6684@raisesections
6685@end ifclear
6686
6687@node M68HC11/68HC12
6688@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6689
6690@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6691
6692@subsection Linker Relaxation
6693
6694For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6695optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6696
6697@table @emph
6698@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6699@item relaxing address modes
6700@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6701targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6702program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6703respectively.
6704
6705@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6706transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6707page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6708
6709@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6710When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6711of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6712addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6713@code{bset} instructions.
6714
6715@end table
6716
6717@subsection Trampoline Generation
6718
6719@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6720@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6721For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6722call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6723will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6724trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6725case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6726point to the function trampoline.
6727
6728@ifclear GENERIC
6729@lowersections
6730@end ifclear
6731@end ifset
6732
36f63dca 6733@node ARM
3674e28a 6734@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6735
6736@cindex ARM interworking support
6737@kindex --support-old-code
6738For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6739between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6740been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6741line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6742libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6743option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6744given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6745which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6746the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6747non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6748
6749@cindex thumb entry point
6750@cindex entry point, thumb
6751@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6752The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6753@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6754But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6755branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6756executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6757
ce11ba6c
KT
6758@cindex PE import table prefixing
6759@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6760The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6761the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6762element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6763import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6764
e489d0ae
PB
6765@cindex BE8
6766@kindex --be8
6767The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6768executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6769objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6770option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6771little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6772
3674e28a
PB
6773@cindex TARGET1
6774@kindex --target1-rel
6775@kindex --target1-abs
6776The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6777@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6778or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6779and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6780
6781@cindex TARGET2
6782@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6783The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6784@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6785meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6786@table @samp
6787@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6788@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6789@item abs
6790@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6791@item got-rel
6792@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6793@end table
6794
319850b4
JB
6795@cindex FIX_V4BX
6796@kindex --fix-v4bx
6797The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6798specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6799interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6800also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6801
6802In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6803linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6804@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6805
6806In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6807relocations are ignored.
6808
845b51d6
PB
6809@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6810@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6811Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6812relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6813
6814@smallexample
6815TST rM, #1
6816MOVEQ PC, rM
6817BX Rn
6818@end smallexample
6819
6820This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6821and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6822condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6823
33bfe774
JB
6824@cindex USE_BLX
6825@kindex --use-blx
6826The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6827BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6828situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6829code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6830each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6831
6832This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6833specify it if you are using that target.
6834
c6dd86c6
JB
6835@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6836@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6837The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6838bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6839instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6840to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6841the support code can read the intended values.
6842
6843The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6844intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6845and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6846intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6847full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6848you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6849
6850If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6851enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6852@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6853mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6854vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6855@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6856
6857If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6858potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6859such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6860first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6861instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6862the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6863are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6864
2de70689
MGD
6865@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6866@kindex --fix-arm1176
6867@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6868The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6869in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6870are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6871unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6872
9d5777a3 6873Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6874Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6875http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6876
a504d23a
LA
6877@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6878@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6879
6880The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6881workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6882the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6883off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6884the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6885core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6886integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6887VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6888
6889The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6890necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6891
6892The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6893@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6894STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6895linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6896@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6897
6898If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6899potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6900such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6901replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6902branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6903then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6904
6905The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6906the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6907
6908The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6909they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6910there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6911occurs.
6912
6913The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6914PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6915large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6916cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6917occurs.
6918
bf21ed78
MS
6919@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6920@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6921The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6922warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6923enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6924linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6925using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6926not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6927
6928@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6929@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6930The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6931warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6932@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6933linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6934using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6935
726150b7
NC
6936@cindex PIC_VENEER
6937@kindex --pic-veneer
6938The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6939ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6940is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6941@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6942
6943@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6944@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6945The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6946code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6947perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6948placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6949controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6950The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6951duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6952group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6953code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6954where they should be placed.
6955
6956The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6957@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6958placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6959branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6960placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6961value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6962exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6963A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6964linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6965from the input sections.
6966
6967The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6968@samp{N = +1}.
6969
1a51c1a4
NC
6970Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6971only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6972otherwise.
6973
1db37fe6
YG
6974@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6975@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6976@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6977The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6978
6979The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6980
68fcca92
JW
6981@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6982@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6983@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6984The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6985
6986Please contact ARM for further details.
6987
1db37fe6
YG
6988@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6989@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6990@cindex Merging exidx entries
6991The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6992
6993@kindex --long-plt
6994@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6995The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6996which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6997entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6998
1f56df9d
JW
6999@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7000@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7001The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7002link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7003
4ba2ef8f
TP
7004@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7005All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7006Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7007@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7008veneers in memory.
7009
54ddd295
TP
7010@kindex --cmse-implib
7011@cindex Secure gateway import library
7012The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7013specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7014secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7015executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7016
0955507f
TP
7017@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7018@cindex Input import library
7019The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7020must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7021given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7022in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7023@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7024library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7025library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7026for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7027specified.
7028
36f63dca
NC
7029@ifclear GENERIC
7030@lowersections
7031@end ifclear
7032@end ifset
7033
7034@ifset HPPA
7035@ifclear GENERIC
7036@raisesections
7037@end ifclear
7038
7039@node HPPA ELF32
7040@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7041@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7042@kindex --multi-subspace
7043When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7044import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7045The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7046stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7047multiple sub-spaces.
7048
7049@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7050@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7051Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7052stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7053@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7054sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7055a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7056the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7057conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7058prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7059A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7060branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7061@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7062@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7063detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7064positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7065
7066Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7067single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7068create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7069large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7070
7071@ifclear GENERIC
7072@lowersections
7073@end ifclear
7074@end ifset
7075
7fb9f789
NC
7076@ifset M68K
7077@ifclear GENERIC
7078@raisesections
7079@end ifclear
7080
7081@node M68K
7082@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7083
7084@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7085@kindex --got=@var{type}
7086The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7087The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7088@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7089the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7090@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7091entries only at non-negative offsets.
7092@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7093entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7094support such GOTs.
7095@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7096output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7097file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7098files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7099
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@lowersections
7102@end ifclear
7103@end ifset
7104
833794fc
MR
7105@ifset MIPS
7106@ifclear GENERIC
7107@raisesections
7108@end ifclear
7109
7110@node MIPS
7111@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7112
7113@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7114@kindex --insn32
7115@kindex --no-insn32
7116The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7117microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7118in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7119used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7120or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7121including 16-bit ones where possible.
7122
8b10b0b3
MR
7123@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7124@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7125@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7126The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7127control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7128@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7129relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7130calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7131relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7132instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7133or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7134the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7135
833794fc
MR
7136@ifclear GENERIC
7137@lowersections
7138@end ifclear
7139@end ifset
7140
36f63dca
NC
7141@ifset MMIX
7142@ifclear GENERIC
7143@raisesections
7144@end ifclear
7145
7146@node MMIX
7147@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7148For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7149@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7150understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7151can translate between the two formats.
7152
7153There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7154Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7155registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7156equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7157@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7158global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7159this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7160symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7161
7a2de473
HPN
7162Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7163@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7164The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7165of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7166
7167Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7168are left out from an mmo file.
7169
7170@ifclear GENERIC
7171@lowersections
7172@end ifclear
7173@end ifset
7174
7175@ifset MSP430
7176@ifclear GENERIC
7177@raisesections
7178@end ifclear
7179
7180@node MSP430
7181@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7182For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7183will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7184just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7185
7186@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7187The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7188
7189@table @code
7190@item @samp{.vectors}
7191Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7192
7193@item @samp{.bootloader}
7194Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7195in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7196
7197@item @samp{.infomem}
7198Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7199this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7200
c0065db7 7201@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7202This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7203in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7204
7205@item @samp{.noinit}
7206Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7207
c0065db7 7208The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7209@end table
7210
7211@ifclear GENERIC
7212@lowersections
7213@end ifclear
7214@end ifset
7215
35c08157
KLC
7216@ifset NDS32
7217@ifclear GENERIC
7218@raisesections
7219@end ifclear
7220
7221@node NDS32
7222@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7223@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7224For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7225relaxes objects according to these options.
7226
7227@table @code
7228@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7229Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7230
7231@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7232Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7233
7234@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7235Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7236
7237@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7238Export the EX9 table after linking.
7239
7240@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7241Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7242
7243@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7244Update the existing EX9 table.
7245
7246@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7247Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7248
7249@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7250Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7251
7252@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7253Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7254
7255@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7256Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7257@end table
7258
7259@ifclear GENERIC
7260@lowersections
7261@end ifclear
7262@end ifset
7263
78058a5e
SL
7264@ifset NIOSII
7265@ifclear GENERIC
7266@raisesections
7267@end ifclear
7268
7269@node Nios II
7270@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7271@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7272@kindex --relax on Nios II
7273
7274Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7275transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7276which may result in @command{ld} giving
7277@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7278The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7279trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7280outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7281trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7282be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7283larger than 256MB.
7284
7285The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7286is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7287@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7288locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7289source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7290register as a temporary.
7291
7292Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7293relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7294option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7295
7296@ifclear GENERIC
7297@lowersections
7298@end ifclear
7299@end ifset
7300
2a60a7a8
AM
7301@ifset POWERPC
7302@ifclear GENERIC
7303@raisesections
7304@end ifclear
7305
7306@node PowerPC ELF32
7307@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7308@cindex PowerPC long branches
7309@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7310Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7311displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7312@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7313@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7314the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7315section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7316section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7317@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7318both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7319considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7320
7321@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7322@table @option
7323@cindex PowerPC PLT
7324@kindex --bss-plt
7325@item --bss-plt
7326Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7327generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7328the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7329writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7330@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7331PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7332compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7333BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7334
016687f8
AM
7335@kindex --secure-plt
7336@item --secure-plt
7337@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7338@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7339when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7340layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7341style BSS PLT.
7342
2a60a7a8
AM
7343@cindex PowerPC GOT
7344@kindex --sdata-got
7345@item --sdata-got
7346The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7347sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7348@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7349section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7350@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7351@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7352@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7353@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7354PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7355pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7356GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7357really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7358
7359@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7360@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7361@item --emit-stub-syms
7362This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7363symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7364
7365@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7366@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7367@item --no-tls-optimize
7368PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7369sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7370disable the optimization.
7371@end table
7372
7373@ifclear GENERIC
7374@lowersections
7375@end ifclear
7376@end ifset
7377
7378@ifset POWERPC64
7379@ifclear GENERIC
7380@raisesections
7381@end ifclear
7382
7383@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7384@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7385
7386@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7387@table @option
7388@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7389@kindex --stub-group-size
7390@item --stub-group-size
7391Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7392by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7393@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7394sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7395a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7396the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7397conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7398prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7399A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7400branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7401@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7402@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7403detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7404positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7405
7406Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7407single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7408create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7409large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7410
7411@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7412@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7413@item --emit-stub-syms
7414This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7415symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7416
7417@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7418@kindex --dotsyms
7419@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7420@item --dotsyms
7421@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7422These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7423in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7424function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7425code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7426properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7427to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7428@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7429dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7430feature.
7431
7ae4ea7d
AM
7432@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7433@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7434@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7435@item --save-restore-funcs
7436@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7437These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7438provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7439@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7440function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7441link.
7442
2a60a7a8
AM
7443@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7444@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7445@item --no-tls-optimize
7446PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7447sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7448disable the optimization.
7449
7c9cf415
AM
7450@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7451@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7452@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7453@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7454@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7455These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7456stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7457an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7458@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7459stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7460option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7461Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7462slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7463application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7464normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7465
2a60a7a8
AM
7466@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7467@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7468@item --no-opd-optimize
7469PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7470corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7471the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7472Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7473
7474@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7475@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7476@item --non-overlapping-opd
7477Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7478@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7479the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7480entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7481
7482@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7483@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7484@item --no-toc-optimize
7485PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7486entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7487reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7488marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7489marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7490relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7491unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7492reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7493discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7494reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7495code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7496optimization.
7497
7498@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7499@kindex --no-multi-toc
7500@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7501If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7502@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7503where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7504entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7505total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7506grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7507TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7508calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7509help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
751064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7511Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7512
7513@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7514@kindex --no-toc-sort
7515@item --no-toc-sort
7516By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7517happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7518placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7519with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7520referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7521@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7522results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7523off this feature.
7524
7525@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7526@kindex --plt-align
7527@kindex --no-plt-align
7528@item --plt-align
7529@itemx --no-plt-align
7530Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7531padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7532specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7533that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7534stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7535
7536@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7537@kindex --plt-static-chain
7538@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7539@item --plt-static-chain
7540@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7541Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7542chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7543chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7544
7545@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7546@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7547@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7548@item --plt-thread-safe
7549@itemx --no-thread-safe
7550With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7551lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7552another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7553order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7554memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7555barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7556looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7557seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7558default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7559@end table
7560
7561@ifclear GENERIC
7562@lowersections
7563@end ifclear
7564@end ifset
7565
49fa1e15
AM
7566@ifset SPU
7567@ifclear GENERIC
7568@raisesections
7569@end ifclear
7570
7571@node SPU ELF
7572@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7573
7574@cindex SPU ELF options
7575@table @option
7576
7577@cindex SPU plugins
7578@kindex --plugin
7579@item --plugin
7580This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7581
7582@cindex SPU overlays
7583@kindex --no-overlays
7584@item --no-overlays
7585Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7586regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7587@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7588turns off all this special overlay handling.
7589
7590@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7591@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7592@item --emit-stub-syms
7593This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7594symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7595
7596@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7597@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7598@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7599This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7600function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7601on calls to non-overlay regions.
7602
7603@cindex SPU local store size
7604@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7605@item --local-store=lo:hi
7606@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7607the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7608range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7609
c0065db7 7610@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7611@kindex --stack-analysis
7612@item --stack-analysis
7613SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7614unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7615under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7616@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7617@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7618determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7619for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7620for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7621for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7622find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7623and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7624under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7625dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7626is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7627and calls will be given.
7628
c0065db7 7629@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7630@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7631@item --emit-stack-syms
7632This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7633in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7634These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7635functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7636functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7637such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7638The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7639@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7640@end table
7641
7642@ifclear GENERIC
7643@lowersections
7644@end ifclear
7645@end ifset
7646
36f63dca
NC
7647@ifset TICOFF
7648@ifclear GENERIC
7649@raisesections
7650@end ifclear
7651
7652@node TI COFF
7653@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7654@cindex TI COFF versions
7655@kindex --format=@var{version}
7656The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7657TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7658also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7659format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7660header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7661
7662@ifclear GENERIC
7663@lowersections
7664@end ifclear
7665@end ifset
7666
2ca22b03
NC
7667@ifset WIN32
7668@ifclear GENERIC
7669@raisesections
7670@end ifclear
7671
7672@node WIN32
7673@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7674
c0065db7 7675This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7676See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7677command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7678
7679@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7680@cindex import libraries
7681@item import libraries
69da35b5 7682The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7683libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7684regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7685archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7686support for creating such libraries provided with the
7687@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7688
c0065db7
RM
7689@item exporting DLL symbols
7690@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7691The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7692
7693@table @emph
7694@item using auto-export functionality
7695@cindex using auto-export functionality
7696By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7697which is controlled by the following command line options:
7698
0a5d968e
NC
7699@itemize
7700@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7701@item --exclude-symbols
7702@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7703@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7704@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7705@end itemize
7706
09e2aba4
DK
7707When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7708(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7709symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7710often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7711private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7712options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7713exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7714final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7715
7716If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7717command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7718if either of the following are true:
7719
7720@itemize
7721@item A DEF file is used.
7722@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7723@end itemize
dc8465bf 7724
c0065db7
RM
7725@item using a DEF file
7726@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7727Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7728an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7729exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7730name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7731command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7732
7733@example
7734gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7735@end example
7736
0a5d968e
NC
7737Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7738@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7739
dc8465bf
NC
7740Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7741
7742@example
4b5bd4e7 7743LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7744
7745EXPORTS
7746foo
7747bar
7748_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7749another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7750var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7751doo = foo == foo2
7752eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7753@end example
dc8465bf 7754
7fcab871 7755This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7756symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7757alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7758by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7759@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7760@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7761export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7762in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7763symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7764
6b31ad16
DS
7765The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7766name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7767the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7768
b45619c0
NC
7769When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7770library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7771@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7772executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7773
7774With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7775specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7776non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7777
7778If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7779or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7780filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7781
4b5bd4e7
DS
7782The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7783
7784@example
7785EXPORTS
7786 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7787 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7788 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7789@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7790
7791Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7792@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7793@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7794@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7795Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7796@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7797string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7798
7799The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7800
7801@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7802will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7803by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7804linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7805library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7806
7807@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7808The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7809the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7810@code{*_imp__foo}).
7811
7812@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7813well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7814read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7815variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7816the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7817extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7818application will behave unexpectedly.
7819
7820@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7821it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7822symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7823API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7824the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7825
4b5bd4e7
DS
7826See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7827other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7828
7829@cindex creating a DEF file
7830While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7831with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7832
7833@item Using decorations
7834@cindex Using decorations
7835Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7836itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7837declared as:
7838
7839@example
7840__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7841__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7842@end example
7843
7844All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7845any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7846this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7847the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7848
7849Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7850decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7851instead:
7852
7853@example
7854__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7855__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7856@end example
7857
c0065db7
RM
7858This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7859when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7860variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7861code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7862of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7863omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7864@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7865information.
c0065db7 7866@end table
dc8465bf 7867
2ca22b03
NC
7868@cindex automatic data imports
7869@item automatic data imports
7870The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7871by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7872compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7873issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7874code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7875c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7876initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7877decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7878platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7879command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7880The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7881suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7882trigger the feature's use.
7883
c0065db7 7884auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7885additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7886
c0065db7 7887"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7888documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7889
c0065db7
RM
7890The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7891occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7892One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7893below.
7894
7895@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7896For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7897object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7898offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7899field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7900in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7901without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7902The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7903references.
7904
c0065db7
RM
7905The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7906be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7907themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7908runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7909compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7910support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7911run without error on an older system.
7912
c0065db7
RM
7913@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7914enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7915
7916@cindex direct linking to a dll
7917@item direct linking to a dll
7918The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7919including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7920libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7921traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7922libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7923function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7924though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7925storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7926tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7927large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7928
c0065db7 7929Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7930@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7931of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7932perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7933select the dll instead of an import library.
7934
2ca22b03 7935
69da35b5
NC
7936For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7937to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7938
7939@example
45e948fe
NC
7940libxxx.dll.a
7941xxx.dll.a
7942libxxx.a
7943xxx.lib
69da35b5 7944cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7945libxxx.dll
7946xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7947@end example
7948
69da35b5
NC
7949before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7950
c0065db7
RM
7951(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7952where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7953@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7954file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7955@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7956
c0065db7
RM
7957Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7958@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7959was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7960various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7961could coexist on the same machine.
7962
2ca22b03
NC
7963The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7964applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7965libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7966
7967@example
7968bin/
7969 cygxxx.dll
7970lib/
7971 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7972 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7973@end example
7974
c0065db7
RM
7975Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7976done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7977
79781. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7979@example
7980gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7981@end example
2ca22b03 7982
69da35b5
NC
7983However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7984(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7985@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7986not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7987
2ca22b03
NC
79882. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7989directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7990should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7991making the app/dll.
7992
7993@example
7994ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7995@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7996
7997Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7998
7999@example
8000gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8001@end example
69da35b5
NC
8002
8003This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8004perfectly legal
8005
8006@example
8007bin/
8008 cygxxx-5.dll
8009lib/
c0065db7 8010 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8011@end example
8012
dc8465bf 8013Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8014even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8015@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8016
8017Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8018wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8019
80201. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8021work with auto-imported data.
8022
dc8465bf
NC
80232. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8024import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8025symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8026for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8027possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8028
45e948fe
NC
80293. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8030critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8031in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8032stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8033
69da35b5 8034So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8035true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8036a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8037binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8038massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8039requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8040will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8041
c0065db7 8042@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8043@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8044@item adding additional names
8045Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8046A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8047exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8048when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8049import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8050
c0065db7 8051@example
dc8465bf
NC
8052LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8053
8054EXPORTS
c0065db7 8055foo
dc8465bf 8056_foo = foo
c0065db7 8057@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8058
8059The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8060
8061Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8062source code using the "weak" attribute:
8063
c0065db7
RM
8064@example
8065void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8066void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8067@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8068
8069See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8070symbols.
8071
8072@item renaming symbols
8073Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8074kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8075@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8076DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8077created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8078
c0065db7 8079@example
dc8465bf
NC
8080LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8081
8082EXPORTS
8083_foo = foo
c0065db7 8084@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8085
8086The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8087@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8088@end table
dc8465bf 8089
0a5d968e 8090Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8091unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8092If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8093@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8094that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8095@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8096renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8097to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8098the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8099In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8100which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8101
8102@cindex weak externals
8103@item weak externals
8104The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8105weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8106defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8107are three variants of weak externals:
8108@itemize
8109@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8110called lazy externals.
8111@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8112This form is not presently implemented.
8113@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8114implemented.
8115@end itemize
8116As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8117are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8118uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8119
8120@cindex aligned common symbols
8121@item aligned common symbols
8122As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8123desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8124the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8125carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8126by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8127tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8128but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8129warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8130
2ca22b03
NC
8131@end table
8132
8133@ifclear GENERIC
8134@lowersections
8135@end ifclear
8136@end ifset
8137
e0001a05
NC
8138@ifset XTENSA
8139@ifclear GENERIC
8140@raisesections
8141@end ifclear
8142
8143@node Xtensa
8144@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8145
8146@cindex Xtensa processors
8147The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8148@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8149specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8150keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8151example, with the command:
8152
8153@smallexample
8154SECTIONS
8155@{
8156 .text : @{
8157 *(.literal .text)
8158 @}
8159@}
8160@end smallexample
8161
8162@noindent
8163@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8164and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8165literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8166interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8167group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8168files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8169and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8170
43cd72b9 8171@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8172@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8173Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8174provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8175is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8176literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8177will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8178location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8179the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8180unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8181@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8182range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8183
8184For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8185to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8186instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8187instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8188instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8189@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8190hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8191By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8192switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8193density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8194instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8195performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8196linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8197a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8198
8199The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8200control the linker:
8201
8202@cindex Xtensa options
8203@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8204@item --size-opt
8205When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8206more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8207no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8208alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8209preserve the correctness of the code.
8210@end table
e0001a05
NC
8211
8212@ifclear GENERIC
8213@lowersections
8214@end ifclear
8215@end ifset
8216
252b5132
RH
8217@ifclear SingleFormat
8218@node BFD
8219@chapter BFD
8220
8221@cindex back end
8222@cindex object file management
8223@cindex object formats available
8224@kindex objdump -i
8225The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8226These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8227object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8228format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8229it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8230associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8231object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8232(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8233list all the formats available for your configuration.
8234
8235@cindex BFD requirements
8236@cindex requirements for BFD
8237As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8238several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8239BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8240formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8241been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8242BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8243may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8244
8245One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8246mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8247useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8248conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8249
8250@menu
8251* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8252@end menu
8253
8254@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8255@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8256@cindex opening object files
8257@include bfdsumm.texi
8258@end ifclear
8259
8260@node Reporting Bugs
8261@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8262@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8263@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8264
ff5dcc92 8265Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8266
8267Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8268it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8269to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8270work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8271@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8272
8273In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8274information that enables us to fix the bug.
8275
8276@menu
8277* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8278* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8279@end menu
8280
8281@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8282@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8283@cindex bug criteria
8284
8285If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8286
8287@itemize @bullet
8288@cindex fatal signal
8289@cindex linker crash
8290@cindex crash of linker
8291@item
8292If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8293@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8294
8295@cindex error on valid input
8296@item
ff5dcc92 8297If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8298
8299@cindex invalid input
8300@item
ff5dcc92 8301If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8302may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8303object files are correct.
8304
8305@item
8306If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8307improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8308@end itemize
8309
8310@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8311@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8312@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8313@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8314
8315A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8316products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8317recommend you contact that organization first.
8318
8319You can find contact information for many support companies and
8320individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8321distribution.
8322
ad22bfe8 8323@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8324Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8325@value{BUGURL}.
8326@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8327
8328The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8329@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8330fact or leave it out, state it!
8331
8332Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8333problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8334assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8335matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8336the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8337location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8338were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8339into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8340specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8341and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8342
8343Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8344the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8345on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8346
8347Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8348bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8349respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8350You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8351
8352To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8353
8354@itemize @bullet
8355@item
ff5dcc92 8356The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8357the @samp{--version} argument.
8358
8359Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8360the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8361
8362@item
ff5dcc92 8363Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8364patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8365
8366@item
8367The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8368version number.
8369
8370@item
ff5dcc92 8371What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8372``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8373
8374@item
8375The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8376observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8377list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8378sufficient.
8379
8380If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8381and then we might not encounter the bug.
8382
8383@item
8384A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8385bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8386provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8387bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8388state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8389requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8390we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8391attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8392
8393If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8394@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8395object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8396@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8397how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8398
8399@item
8400A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8401incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8402
ff5dcc92 8403Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8404will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8405not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8406a chance to make a mistake.
8407
8408Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8409say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8410copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8411C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8412and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8413fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8414you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8415any conclusion from our observations.
8416
8417@item
ff5dcc92 8418If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8419diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8420@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8421If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8422context, not by line number.
8423
8424The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8425sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8426@end itemize
8427
8428Here are some things that are not necessary:
8429
8430@itemize @bullet
8431@item
8432A description of the envelope of the bug.
8433
8434Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8435which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8436changes will not affect it.
8437
8438This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8439will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8440with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8441We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8442
8443Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8444of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8445output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8446less time, and so on.
8447
8448However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8449report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8450
8451@item
8452A patch for the bug.
8453
8454A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8455the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8456a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8457to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8458
ff5dcc92 8459Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8460construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8461through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8462able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8463fixed.
8464
8465And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8466patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8467help us to understand.
8468
8469@item
8470A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8471
8472Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8473things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8474@end itemize
8475
8476@node MRI
8477@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8478@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8479To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8480linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8481alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8482described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8483simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8484@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8485linker commands; these commands are described here.
8486
8487In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8488file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8489features to make use of them.
8490
8491You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8492@samp{-c} command-line option.
8493
8494Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8495command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8496blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8497MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8498issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8499
8500Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8501
8502You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8503lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8504The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8505
8506@table @code
8507@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8508@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8509@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8510Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8511the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8512@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8513your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8514script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8515commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8516input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8517@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8518
8519@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8520@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8521Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8522in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8523
8524@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8525
8526@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8527@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8528Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8529@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8530
8531@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8532@item BASE @var{expression}
8533Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8534absolute addresses) in the output file.
8535
8536@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8537@item CHIP @var{expression}
8538@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8539This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8540
8541@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8542@item END
8543This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8544
8545@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8546@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8547Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8548language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8549
8550@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8551@item
252b5132
RH
8552S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8553
8554@item
8555IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8556
8557@item
8558COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8559@samp{COFF}
8560@end enumerate
8561
8562@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8563@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8564Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8565@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8566
8567The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8568same line, with no change in its effect.
8569
8570@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8571@item LOAD @var{filename}
8572@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8573Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8574same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8575command line.
8576
8577@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8578@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8579@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8580MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8581option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8582
8583@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8584@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8585@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8586Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8587order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8588script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8589sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8590file, in the order specified.
8591
8592@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8593@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8594@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8595@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8596Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8597@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8598
8599@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8600@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8601@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8602@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8603You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8604specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8605If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8606@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8607@end table
8608
793c5807
NC
8609@node GNU Free Documentation License
8610@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8611@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8612
370b66a1
CD
8613@node LD Index
8614@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8615
8616@printindex cp
8617
8618@tex
7ca01ed9 8619% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8620% meantime:
8621\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8622\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8623\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8624\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8625\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8626\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8627\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8628\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8629\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8630% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8631@end tex
8632
252b5132 8633@bye
This page took 1.323987 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.